Home

User Manual

1. Table 52 Terminal Name Function Default Signal Type 1 10 V 10 VDC Supply voltage 10 VDC max 10 mA output 2 Anln1 Process reference d EAE n LM hoo mA analogue input NU RIS D Nm Anne i WEM MO VDC or 20 20 ma a7a o8ue input 5 anna fon bipolar lt 10 40 VDC or 20 20 ma analoeue input 6 10 V 10VDC Supply voltage 10 VDC max 10 mA output T Common Signal ground OV output 8 Digln 1 RunL 0 8 24 VDC digital input 9 Digln 2 RunR 0 8 24 VDC digital input 10 Digln 3 Off 0 8 24 VDC digital input 11 24 V 24VDC Supply voltage 24 VDC 100 mA output 12 Common Signal ground OV output 13 AnOut 1 Min speed to max speed 0 10 VDC or0 4 20 mA analogue output 14 AnOut 2 O to max torque O x10 VDC or 0 4 20 mA analogue output 15 Common Signal ground OV output 16 Digln 4 Off 0 8 24 VDC digital input 17 Digln 5 Off 0 8 24 VDC digital input 18 Digln 6 Off 0 8 24 VDC digital input 19 Digln 7 Off 0 8 24 VDC digital input 20 DigOut 1 Ready 24 VDC 100 mA digital output 21 DigOut 2 Brake 24 VDC 100 mA digital output 22 Digln 8 RESET 0 8 24 VDC digital input Terminal X2 31 N C 1 Relay 1 output 32 COM1 VoD isin a TRIP condition N C is opened when the relay is active petente irea chenga over relay output f 0 1 2 A Umax 250 VAC or 42 VDC 33 N O 1 valid for all relays l N O is closed when the relay is active valid for all relays Terminal X3 e Relay 2 Qutput p
2. 3A5 PreLimSwSpd 5133 Anin1 Bipol 20 00mA 3A6 CrawlSpd H R 5134 Anin1 FcMin Min 3AT CrawlSpd L L 5135 Anini ValMin 0 3A8 Speed 2 5136 Anln1 FcMax Max 3A9 Speed 3 5137 Anln1 ValMax 0 344 Seea 5138 Anln1 Oper Add 3AB Dev Bandwidt 5139 Anln41 Filt 0 1s 3AC Dev Time ms 513A Anln1 Enabl On 3AD LAFS Load 514 Anin2 Fc Off 3AE Crane Inputs 515 AnIn2 Setup 4 20mA 3AF CraneOutputs 516 Anin2 Advan 400 Monitor Prot 5161 Anln2 Min 4mA 410 Load Monitor 5162 Anln2 Max 20 00mA 411 Alarm Select Off 5163 Anin2 Bipol 20 00mA 412 Alarm trip Off 5164 Anin2 FcMin Min 413 Ramp Alarm Off 5165 Anin2 ValMin 0 414 Start Delay 2s 5166 Anln2 FcMax Max 415 loadTtppe Bar 5167 Anin2 ValMax 0 416 Max Alarm 5168 Anin2 Oper Add 4161 MaxAlarmMar RH 5169 Anin2 Filt O 1s 4162 MaxAlamDel Tos 516A Anin2 Enabl On 417 Max Pre alarm 517 Anin3 Fc Off 4171 MaxPreAlMar 1096 518 Anln3 Setup 4 20mA 4172 MaxPreAIDel 0 1s 519 AnIn3 Advan 418 Min Pre Alarm 5191 Anln3 Min 4mA 4181 MinPreAlMar 10 5192 AnIn3 Max 20 00mA 4182 MinPrealbel Tos 5193 Anln3 Bipol 20 00mA 419 Min Alarm 5194 Anln3 FcMin Min 4191 MinAlarmMar 1596 5195 Anin3 ValMin o 4192 MindlarmDel Tos 5196 Anin3 FcMax Max 41A Autoset Alrm No 5197 Anln3 ValMax 0 41B Normal Load 10096 5198 Anln3 Oper Add 41C Load Curve 5199 Anln3 Filt 0 1s 41C1 Load Curve 1 100 519A Anln3 Enabl On
3. see menu 250 Autoreset Normal trips are default For Trip Warnin Trip Warning normal trips the VSD stops immediately i e the motor ndi Selections Normal indicators coasts naturally to a standstill For soft trips the VSD Soft Area D stops by ramping down the speed i e the motor decel Motor Pt Trip Off Limit Normal Soft IX erates to a standstill PTC Trip Off Normal Soft USOS THp Motor lost Trip Off N e The VSD stops immediately the motor coasts to nat OTR DS rip Smg urally to a standstill Locked rotor Trip Off Normal The Trip relay or output is active if selected Ext trip Via Digln Normal Soft The Trip LED is on Ext Mot Temp Via Digln Normal Soft The accompanying trip message is displayed Mon MaxAlarm Trip Off Warn Normal Soft The TRP status indication is displayed area D of Mon MinAlarm Trip Off Warn Normal Soft the display Comm error Trip Off Warn Normal Soft Soft Trip PT100 Trip Off Normal Soft e the VSD stops by decelerating to a standstill DESISdOR Via Option Normal During the deceleration Pump Via Option TE The accompanying trip message is displayed 3 s S Overt O N l OT including an additional soft trip indicator S before Neu i Sne the trip time Over curr F On Normal The Trip LED is blinking Over volt D On Normal The Warning relay or output is active if selected Over volt G On Normal After standstill is reached
4. i Gland d Glands M25 0026 0094 M20 M32 0037 004 9 N Glands M32 0026 003 M40 0037 0044 Fig 9 NVX48 52 Model 0003 to 0018 B with optional gland plate NOTE Glands for size B and C available as option kit Fig 11 Cable interface for mains motor and communication JNVX48 52 Model 0026 to 0046 C Mounting 11 30 160 2 Jy i i amp SO e e 1 Ld 1 z ay 220 Membrane cable 5 gland M60 es a Fig 12 JNVX40 50 Model 0046 0073 X2 External Interface Glands M20 Glands M40 Fig 13 Cable interface for mains motor and communication JNVX40 50 Model 0046 0073 X2 Fig 14 JNVX48 Model 0090 to 0175 E including cable interface for mains motor and communication 12 Mounting Cable dimensions 27 66 mm 922 50 Fig 15 JNVX48 Model 0210 to 0250 F JNVX69 Model 0090 to 0175 F69 including cable interface for mains motor and communication 2 3 Cabinet mounting 2 3 1 Cooling If the variable speed drive is installed in a cabinet the rate of airflow supplied b
5. 387 PID Act Marg StpiN Orpm Default 0 Range O 10000 in Process unit Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43372 Profibus slot index 170 21 Fieldbus format Long Modbus format Elnt NOTE The margin is always a positive value Example 1 PID control normal flow or pres sure control 321 F Anin 322 Bar 310 20 Bar 342 2 s inactive since 386 is activated and have higher priority 381 On 386 10s 387 1 Bar The VSD will stop sleep when the speed PID output is below or equal to Min Speed for 10 seconds The VSD will activate wake up when the Process value goes below the PID Activation Margin which is related to the process reference i e goes below 20 1 Bar See Fig 75 711 Process Value 310 Process Ref m L OAR TS Activate Wake up 712 Speed 386 _____ Stop Sleep 341 Min Speed Fig 75 PID Stop sleep with normal PID Example 2 PID control inverted tank level 92 Functional Description control 321 F Anin 322 m 310 2 7 m 342 2 s inactive since 386 is activated and have higher priority 381 Inverted 386 30s 387 2 1m The VSD will stop sleep when the speed PID output is below or equal to Min Speed for 30 seconds The VSD will activate wake up when the Process value goes above the PID Activation Margin whic
6. Next key Character No for serial Character No for serial comm comm Space 0 m 58 0 9 1 10 n 59 A 11 60 B 12 o 61 C 13 6 62 D 14 63 E 15 p 64 d 16 q 65 G 17 r 66 n 18 s 67 19 t 68 20 u 69 21 70 r 22 v 71 M 23 w 72 N 24 x 73 2 25 y 74 Character No for serial Character No for serial comm comm 5 26 z 75 Q 27 76 28 77 29 78 T 30 79 U 31 80 32 81 V 33 82 W 4 83 35 amp 84 36 85 E 37 86 A 2m 87 A 39 i 88 40 89 P 41 90 42 91 i 43 92 id 44 93 a 45 94 e 46 95 47 lt 96 ii 48 97 49 gt 98 2 99 g 51 100 52 f 101 53 102 54 103 J 55 104 56 105 57 Example Create a user unit named kPa 1 When in the menu 323 press Next to move the cur sor to the right most position 2 Press the key until the character k is displayed 3 Press Next 4 Then press the key until P is displayed and con firm with Next Functional Description TT 5 Repeat until you have entered kPa 323 User Unit StpEN Range 0 000 10000 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43311 Default No characters shown Profibus slot index 169 215 THREE Fieldbus format Long 120 001 Communication information Modbus format Elnt 43304 43305 22205 Ratio 326 Modbus Instance n
7. M 133 Nominal motor frequency DETTA 86 5 14 113 655 134 Number of drives cnm 94 D15 iac eet 114 659 iiis ien 134 5 16 iiie eden irte 114 PLD n deu 134 0 O17 isse 114 12 oiii 134 Operation ossis 54 DDS ck nete 114 T3 iie oido e nine 135 OPt ONS ceder abeat decns 26 D19 isse 114 14 iiio slain itis 135 Brake chopper ececcccssssssseeseeee 151 DTA e I nen Ie ose 114 PLO Lue 135 External Control Panel ECP OIB near adden 115 TIO niini ii 135 151 DT ose ardt ertet peres 115 CONSE state Aitne inn 135 G Board em ees ecu 153 022 conscio 115 118 iisstiiesiae nus 135 Output coils 153 522 etie eise eene terrena 116 T9 Le AID 136 Protection class IP23 and IP54 5b29 52H sess 116 TLA uoi eee 136 151 DSL amp seien 117 TB siiani diTi 136 Serial communication fieldbus 932 rniii 117 20 iiie stie nte 136 153 B33 eae en ee tects 118 21 4 eux 136 OR operator 128 O34 isse 119 22 sie eene 136 Output coils 153 5b35 serpenti reris 120 T23 iit a trie ier tine 137 Overlodtd 2 ace cec 38 103 536 iiie 120 T24 isi nq 137 Overload alarm ess 38 DAL uas eee 120 25 ine Ee 138 942 isse 121 120 oiii 138 P DDE ise 122 Nr EM 138 Parmetet sets 952 ceci 122 728 T2A sess 139 Load default values 65 55 3
8. Table 39 Typical motor power at mains voltage 460 V Normal duty Heavy duty i T Meca 120 1 min every 10 min 150 1 min every 10 min UR Power 460V Rated current Power 460V Rated current hp A hp A JNVX48 0003 3 8 dL 2 5 1 2 0 JNVX48 0004 6 0 2 4 0 1 5 3 2 JNVX48 0006 9 0 3 6 0 2 4 8 JNVX48 0008 11 3 3 7 5 3 6 0 B JNVX48 0010 14 3 5 9 5 3 7 6 JNVX48 0013 19 5 7 5 13 0 5 10 4 JNVX48 0018 27 0 10 18 0 T5 14 4 JNVX48 0026 39 15 26 10 21 JNVX48 0031 46 20 31 15 25 JNVX48 0037 55 25 37 20 29 6 o JNVX48 0046 69 30 46 25 37 JNVX50 0060 92 40 61 x2 JNVX48 0090 108 60 90 50 72 JNVX48 0109 131 75 109 60 87 JNVX48 0146 175 100 146 T5 117 JNVX48 0175 210 125 175 100 140 JNVX48 0210 252 150 210 125 168 JNVX48 0250 300 200 250 150 200 i JNVX48 0300 360 250 300 200 240 JNVX48 0375 450 300 375 250 300 JNVX48 0430 516 350 430 250 344 JNVX480 500 600 400 500 350 400 JNVX48 0600 720 500 600 400 480 JNVX48 0650 780 550 650 400 520 l JNVX48 0750 900 600 750 500 600 JNVX48 0860 1032 700 860 550 688 JNVX48 1000 1200 800 1000 600 800 JNVX48 1200 1440 1000 1200 700 960 JNVX48 1500 1800 1250 1500 750 1200 Available during limited time and as long as allowed by drive temperature 158 Technical Data Table 40 Typical motor power at mains voltage 525 V Normal duty Heavy duty
9. esses 163 Environmental conditions usus 164 Fuses cable cross sections and glands 165 According IEC ratings seese 165 Fuses and cable dimensions according NEMA ratings 167 Controlsignals coeperit otn 169 Menu List eese 171 Index eee eeeeeee essen nennen nennt 179 1 Introduction TECO V33 is intended for controlling the speed and torque of standard three phase asynchronous electrical motors The VSD is equipped with direct torque control which uses built in DSP giving the VSD the capability of high dynamic performance even at very low speeds without using feedback signals from the motor There fore the inverter is designed for use in high dynamic applications where low speed high torque and high speed accuracy are demanded In simpler application such as fans or pumps the V33 direct torque control offers other great advantages such as insensitivity to mains disturbances or load shocks NOTE Read this instruction manual carefully before starting installation connection or working with the variable speed drive The following symbols can appear in this manual Always read these first before continuing NOTE Additional information as an aid to avoid problems CAUTION Failure to follow these instructions can result in malfunction or damage to the variable speed drive WARNING
10. Optional R 10 voc e 2 Anin 1 Reference 3 Anin 2 4 Anin 3 Common 12 5 Anin 4 AnOut1 13 6 10 VDC AnOut 2 14 7 Common DigOut 1 20 B Digin 1 RunL DigOut2 54 amp Digln 2 RunR d 10 Digln3 3i 11 24 VDC Relay 1 32 15 Common 33 z Digln 5 41 18 Digln 6 ka r I Relay 2 142 19 Digln 7 ES L Des 22 Digln 8 Reset Lo Option board Fig 29 Connection example Control Connections 23 4 5 Connecting the Control Signals 4 5 1 Cables The standard control signal connections are suitable for stranded flexible wire up to 1 5 mm and for solid wire up to 2 5 mm Control signals Fig 30 Connecting the control signals 0003 to 0018 Control signals Control signals tan Fig 31 Connecting the control signals 0026 to 0046 Fig 32 Connecting the control signals 0060 to 0175 NOTE The screening of control signal cables is necessary to comply with the immunity levels given in the EMC Directive it reduces the noise level NOTE Control cab
11. esses 140 Trip Messages 820 890 141 Reset Trip Log BAO sess 141 System Data 900 142 VSD Data 920 sees 142 Troubleshooting Diagnoses and Mainte nance 145 Trips warnings and limits 145 Trip conditions causes and remedial action 146 Technically qualified personnel 146 Opening the variable speed drive 146 Precautions to take with a connected motor 146 Autoreset Trip oorr rennen rRe rennen 146 MainternariCe enero diei ernst e inrer SER iiai 149 Optlons 5 5 5 25 555 Iiriioreeeterceiiten 151 Options for the control panel 151 EmoSoftCom iid Rappels 151 Brake chopp6r ceste ite ieee aeree ves Sed 151 I O zio iom 153 Output CoilS 2 5 x cedit ie rai 153 Serial communication and fieldbus 153 Standby supply board option s 153 Safe Stop Option 2 ciao en etit as 153 Crane option board ceccsecessesseeeeeseeesseeseeesees 155 ENGOER OL 155 PTO PTT00 inita mE 155 Technical Data 157 Electrical specifications related to model 157 General electrical specifications 161 Operation at higher temperatures 162 Dimensions and Weights
12. 2172 LocRunCtrl Overall limitation of motor rotation direction This function limits the overall rotation either to left or right or both directions This limit is prior to all other selections e g if the rotation is limited to right a Run Left command will be ignored To define left and right rotation we assume that the motor is connected U U V V and W W Speed Direction and Rotation The speed direction can be controlled by RunR RunL commands on the control panel e RunR RunL commands on the terminal strip terminals 1 22 Viathe serial interface options The parameter sets StpfN Standard Default Standard Standard O Local Run Stop control set via 215 Remote 1 Local Run Stop control via remote 56 Functional Description Fig 57 Rotation In this menu you set the general rotation for the motor 219 Rotation Communication information Stp R L Default R L Speed direction is limited to right rota R 1 tion The input and key RunL are disa bled L 2 Speed direction is limited to left rotation The input and key RunR are disabled R L 3 Both speed directions allowed Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43019 Profibus slot index 168 178 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt 11 2 2 Remote Signal Level Edge 21A In this menu you select the way to control the inputs for RunR RunL Stop and
13. 89 Skip Frequency 86 Frequency priority 34 Fuses cable cross sections and glands mie aene 165 G General electrical specifications 161 I 1 0 Board eese 153 I2t protection Motor I2t Current 61 62 63 Motor I2t Type 61 ID FUEL us iniaa ione cro ch art incendit 37 60 Identification Run 37 60 IEG269 nine cet 165 Internal speed control 90 Internal speed controller 90 Speed Time 91 Speed P Gain 90 Interrupt ie ceveevis 74 75 IT Mains supply 2 IxR Compensation 88 J Jog Frequency eseeesssss 87 K Keyboard reference 90 Mo em 42 d 43 HOY 2e ih eret cett ier necs 43 Control keys uss 42 ENTER key seen 43 ESCAPE key eene 43 Function keys 43 NEXT KEY 4i cere ce 43 PREVIOUS key 43 RUNI 5e ecce hir cedes 42 RUNGR ii 5 ee rentre seen inet aad 42 179 STOP RESET 2 ente 42 Toggle Key sss 42 L LCD display esses 41 Level control ssse 36 57 Load default usuuse 65 Load monitor
14. DEFAULT CUSTOM 266A FB Signal 10 364 Preset Ref 3 500 rpm 266B FB Signal 11 365 Preset Ref 4 750 rpm 266C FB Signal 12 366 Preset Ref 5 1000 rpm 266D FB Signal 13 367 Preset Ref 6 1250 rpm 266E FB Signal 14 368 Preset Ref 7 1500 rpm 266F FB Signal 15 369 Keyb Ref Normal 266G FB Signal 16 370 Spd Ctrl PI 269 FB Status 371 Spd PI Auto Off 300 Process 372 Spd P Gain 310 Set View ref 373 Spd Time 320 Proc Setting 380 ProcCtrlPID 321 Proc Source Speed 381 PID Control Off 322 Proc Unit Off 383 PID P Gain 1 0 323 User Unit 0 384 PID Time 1 00s 324 Process Min 0 385 PID D Time 0 00s 325 Process Max 0 386 PID lt MinSpd off 326 Ratio Linear 387 PID Act Marg 0 327 F Val PrMin Min 388 PID Stdy Tst Off 328 F Val PrMax Max 389 PID Stdy Mar 0 330 Start Stop 390 Pump Fan Ctrl 331 Acc Time 10 00s 391 Pump enable Off 332 Dec Time 10 00s 392 No of Drives 2 333 Acc MotPot 16 00s 393 Select Drive Sequence 334 Dec MotPot 16 00s 394 Change Cond Both 335 Acc gt Min Spd 10 00s 395 Change Timer 50h 336 Dec lt Min Spd 10 00s 396 Drives on Ch 0 337 Acc Rmp Linear 397 Upper Band 1096 338
15. 14 2 General electrical specifications Table 43 General electrical specifications General Mains voltage JNVX40 JNVX48 JNVX50 52 JNVX69 Mains frequency Input power factor Output voltage Output frequency Output switching frequency Efficiency at nominal load 230 415V 10 15 10 at 230 V 230 480V 10 15 1096 at 230 V 440 525V 10 15 500 690V 10 15 45 to 65 Hz 0 95 O Mains supply voltage 0 400 Hz 3 kHz 9796 for models 0003 to 0018 9896 for models 0026 to 0046 97 596 for models 0060 to 0073 9896 for models 0090 to 1500 Control signal inputs Analogue differential Analogue Voltage current Max input voltage Input impedance 0 10 V 0 20 mA via switch 30 V 30 mA 20 KQ voltage 250 Q current Resolution 11 bits sign Hardware accuracy 196 type 1 LSB fsd Non linearity 115 LSB Digital Input voltage High gt 9 VDC Low lt 4 VDC Max input voltage Input impedance Signal delay 30 VDC lt 3 3 VDC 4 7 kQ 23 3 VDC 3 6 KQ lt 8 ms Control signal outputs Analogue Output voltage current Max output voltage Short circuit current 00 0 10 V 0 20 mA via software setting 15 V 5 mA cont 15 mA voltage 140 mA current Output impedance 10 Q voltage Resolution 10 bit Maximum load impedance for current 500 Q Hardware accuracy 1 996 type fsd voltage 2 496 type fsd current Offset
16. Keyboard 2 Local Run Stop control via keyboard Com 3 Local Run Stop control via communication Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43010 Profibus slot index 168 169 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Lock Code 218 To prevent the keyboard being used or to change the setup of the VSD and or process control the keyboard can be locked with a password This menu Lock Code 218 is used to lock and unlock the keyboard Enter the password 291 to lock unlock the keyboard opera tion If the keyboard is not locked default the selection Lock Code will appear If the keyboard is already locked the selection Unlock Code will appear When the keyboard is locked parameters can be viewed but not changed The reference value can be changed and the VSD can be started stopped and reversed if these functions are set to be controlled from the keyboard 218 Lock Code StpfN 0 Default 0 Range 0 9999 Rotation 219 2171 LocRefCtrl StpfN Standard Default Standard Standard O Local reference control set via 214 Remote 1 Local reference control via remote Keyboard 2 Local reference control via keyboard Com 3 Local reference control via communication Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43009 Profibus slot index 168 168 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt
17. 38 103 Local Remote sssss 56 Lock code sese 56 Long motor cables 17 Low Voltage Directive 7 Lower Band esee 96 Lower Band Limit 98 M Machine Directive 7 Main MENU eeeeeeeneernnnne 44 Mains supply 15 21 27 Maintenance eeeeesss 149 Manis cables ss 15 Manufacturer s certificate 7 Max Frequency 80 85 86 MEMOIY socie daten feeit 37 Menu 110 ot thesis 53 120 ecc dde 54 210 ciat ttes 54 QUA idi eunonsep apes 54 212 ences 54 213 ctia RE 54 QUAY as bee erts 55 2115 is iuidaiesserupset 55 216 ioo 55 2f iiec iet cerdes 56 218 cte 56 219 4 iiuadiaazeesesenasei 56 2 TA cete e 57 21B i ecce oue 57 220 aui oe erbe 58 221 53 ididatassekaniens 58 222 ooa 58 223 oue eie 58 224 i iat ttd 59 225 e 59 226 iiec tes 59 22 iiie ated 59 228 abe e erbe 59 229 iis isiidaeiasserkups 60 22B onec 60 220 iussus 61 22D nitent enit 61 230 eanne a 61 291 ein n tee 61 232 i i eie iE 61 233 i oe e erts 62 234 innne 63 235 iiie ette 63 236 sedet es 63 2f yos tte ene 63 OAC Ae e tA d 64 QUY eo cetusad mei tedio 64 V EORR 65 DAQY m A rr Ead 65 CLC RP M P 66 O
18. Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43206 Profibus slot index 169 110 Fieldbus format UInt Modbus format UInt Anln1 Function Value Min 5135 With AnIn1 Function ValMin you define a user defined value for the signal Only visible when user defined is selected in menu 5134 With AnIn1 Function VaMax you define a user defined value for the signal Only visible when user defined is selected in menu 5136 5137 AnIn1 VaMax Stp 0 000 Default 0 000 Range 10000 000 10000 000 5135 AnIn1 VaMin Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43551 StpEy 0 000 Profibus slot index 170 200 Default 0 000 Long Speed 1 71 rpm Range 10000 000 10000 000 Fieldbus format E Torque 1 1 Process val 1 0 001 Modbus format Elnt 112 Functional Description NOTE With Anin Min Anin Max Anin Function Min and Anin Function Max settings loss of feedback signals e g voltage drop due to long sensor wiring can be compensated to ensure an accurate process control Example Process sensor is a sensor with the following specifica tion Range 0 3 bar Output 2 10 mA Analogue input should be set up according to 512 AnIn1 Setup User mA 5131 AnIn1 Min 2 mA 5132 AnIn1 Max 10 mA 5134 AnIn1 Function Min User defined 5135 AnIn1 VaMin 0 000 bar 5136 Anin 1 Function Max User defined 5137 AnIn 1 VaMax
19. Table 20 Control keys gives a start with right rotation RUN R NOTE It is not possible to simultaneously activate the Run Stop commands from the keyboard and remotely from the terminal strip terminals 1 22 Fig 50 LED indications Table 19 LED indication Function Symbol ON BLINKING OFF POWER Gower oq Power off green TRIP red VSD tripped Warning Limit No trip Motor speed increase decrease RUN Motor shaft green rotates Motor stopped NOTE If the control panel is built in the back light of the display has the same function as the Power LED in Table 19 Blank panel LEDs 9 2 5 The Toggle and Loc Rem Key This key has two functions Toggle and switching between Loc Rem function LOC Press one second to use the toggle func REM tion Press and hold the toggle key for more than five sec onds to switch between Local and Remote function depending on the settings in 2171 and 2172 When editing values the toggle key can be used to change the sign of the value see section 9 5 page 44 Toggle function Using the toggle function makes it possible to easily step through selected menus in a loop The toggle loop can contain a maximum of ten menus As default the toggle loop contains the menus needed for Quick Setup You can use the toggle loop to create a quick menu for the parameters that are most import
20. n a e Weed 120 1 min every 10 min 150 1 min every 10 min LE Power 525V Rated current Power 525V Rated current kW A kW A JNVX52 0003 3 8 1 1 2 5 1 1 2 0 JNVX52 0004 6 0 2 2 4 0 1 5 3 2 JNVX52 0006 9 0 3 6 0 2 2 4 8 JNVX52 0008 11 3 4 7 5 3 6 0 B JNVX52 0010 14 3 2 9 9 5 4 7 6 JNVX52 0013 19 5 7 5 13 0 5 5 10 4 JNVX52 0018 27 0 11 18 0 7 5 14 4 JNVX52 0026 39 15 26 11 21 JNVX52 0031 46 18 5 31 15 25 JNVX52 0037 55 22 37 18 5 29 6 JNVX52 0046 69 30 46 22 37 JNVX50 0060 92 37 61 X2 JNVX69 0090 108 55 90 45 72 JNVX69 0109 131 75 109 55 87 JNVX69 0146 175 90 146 75 117 is JNVX69 0175 210 110 175 90 140 JNVX69 0210 252 132 210 110 168 JNVX69 0250 300 160 250 132 200 JNVX69 0300 360 200 300 160 240 D JNVX69 0375 450 250 375 200 300 JNVX69 0430 516 300 430 250 344 JNVX69 0500 600 315 500 300 400 js JNVX69 0600 120 400 600 315 480 JNVX69 0650 780 450 650 355 520 di JNVX69 0750 900 500 750 400 600 JNVX69 0860 1032 560 860 450 688 K69 JNVX69 1000 1200 630 1000 500 800 Available during limited time and as long as allowed by drive temperature Technical Data 159 Table 41 Typical motor power at mains voltage 575 V Normal duty Heavy duty Model Bid 120 1 min every 10 min 150 1 min every 10 min Frane size Power 575V hp Rated current A Power 575V hp
21. Menu 237 will now appear 2 Enable input by setting menu 237 Motor PTC On If enabled and 50 ohm a sensor error trip will occur The message Motor PTC is shown Select Set 241 Here you select the parameter set Every menu included in the parameter sets is designated A B C or D depending on the active parameter set Parameter sets can be selected from the keyboard via the pro grammable digital inputs or via serial communication Parameter sets can be changed during the run If the sets are using different motors M1 to M4 the set will be changed when the motor is stopped If the function is disabled and the PTC or resistor is removed the menu will disappear after the next power 241 Select Set up StpFN A NOTE This option is available only for size B and C perai i JNVX48 52 0003 0046 Selection A B C D Digln Com Option A 0 237 Motor PTC B 1 Fixed selection of one of the 4 parameter StpFA Off C 2 sets A B C or D Default off D 3 off 0 Motor PTC protection is disabled Parameter set is selected via a digital Digln 4 input Define which digital input in menu On 1 Motor PTC protection is enabled 520 Digital inputs VPN Parameter set is selected via serial com Communication information Com gt munication z 7 The parameter set is set via an option VOUDUS INSTANCE NO OEVICENSLMO iiid Option 6 Only available if
22. j mand t NG 06 F18 Fig 70 Jog command 11 3 6 Torques 350 Menu with all parameters for torque settings Maximum Torque 351 Sets the maximum torque This Maximum Torque oper ates as an upper torque limit A Speed Reference is always necessary to run the motor Por 9x60 T Mor Nyor 1pm x211 351 Max Torque Stof 120 Default 120 calculated from the motor data Range 0 400 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43141 Profibus slot index 169 45 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 Modbus format Elnt NOTE 100 Torque means Iyom Imor The maximum depends on the motor current and VSD max current settings but the absolute maximum adjustment is 400 NOTE The power loss in the motor will increase by the square of the torque when operating above 100 400 torque will result in 1600 power loss which will increase the motor temperature very quickly Functional Description 87 IXR Compensation 352 This function compensates for the drop in voltage over different resistances such as very long motor cables chokes and motor stator by increasing the output volt age at a constant frequency IxR Compensation is most important at low frequencies and is used to obtain a higher starting torque The maximum voltage increase is 2596 of the nominal output voltage See Fig 71 Selecting
23. 84 Release speed 84 Vector Brake 85 Brake functions Frequency sess 109 Brake resistors 151 C Cable cross section 165 Cable specifications 19 CE marking esee 7 Change Condition 95 Change Timer 95 96 Clockwise rotary field 115 Comparators sseesssss 124 Connecting control signals 24 Connections Brake chopper connections 15 Control signal connections 24 Mains supply 15 27 Motor earth 15 27 Motor output 15 27 Safety earth 15 27 Control panel sessss 41 Control Panel memory 37 Copy all settings to Control Panel readvandsudetacsantenshastne ET 66 Frequengy oneone 109 Control signal connections 24 Control signals 22 25 Edge controlled 36 57 Level controlled 36 57 Counter clockwise rotary field 115 CUITGnt votos rae EIS eSI DENIS 22 Current control O 20maA 26 D DC link residual voltage 2 Deceleration ssssse 80 Deceleration time 80 Ramp type siinne 82 Declaration of Conformity 7
24. B3 Digln 3 52H B stands for board and 1 to 3 is the number of the board which is related Activate deactivate analogue inputs NOTE For bipol function input RunR and RunL needs to Anin select 29 defined in 513A 516A 519A and 51CA Liquid cooling low level signal LC Level 30 NOTE The Liquid Cooling Level is active low be active and Rotation 219 must be set to R L Communication information to the position of the I O option board on the option mounting plate The functions and selections are the same as Digln 1 521 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43501 43509 Profibus slot index Fieldbus format 170 150 170 158 Int Modbus format Int Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43241 Profibus slot index 169 145 Fieldbus format UInt Modbus format UInt Table 26 Parameter Set Set Ctrl 1 Set Ctrl 2 116 Functional Description 11 5 3 Analogue Outputs 530 Submenu with all settings for the analogue outputs Selections can be made from application and VSD val ues in order to visualize actual status Analogue out puts can also be used as a mirror of the analogue input Such a signal can be used as areference signal for the next VSD in a Master Slave configuration see Fig 93 AnOut 1 Setup 532 Preset scaling and offset of the output config
25. Liquid cooling low level 25T Delay time starts counting when the fault disappears When the time delay has elapsed the alarm will be reset if the function is active 25T LC Level StpFA Off Default Off Off 0 Off 1 3600 1 3600 1 3600 s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43099 Profibus slot index 169 3 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 s Modbus format Elnt Liquid Cooling Low level Trip Type 25U Select the preferred way to react to an alarm trip 25U LC Level TT StpEX Trip Default Trip Selection Same as menu 25B Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43100 Profibus slot index 169 4 Fieldbus format UInt Modbus format Ulnt 72 Functional Description 11 2 8 Serial Communication 260 This function is to define the communication parame ters for serial communication There are two types of options available for serial communication RS232 485 Modbus RTU and fieldbus modules Profibus DeviceNet and Ethernet For more information see chapter Serial communication and respective option manual Comm Type 261 Select RS232 485 262 or Fieldbus 263 261 Com Type Stp RS232 485 Default RS232 485 RS232 485 0 RS232 485 selected Fieldbus selected Profibus DeviceNet or Fieldbus 1 Modbus TCP NOTE Toggling the setting
26. 0 0 2 0 4 0 6 Min Max alarm tolerance band graph 0 8 1 421 Low Volt OR StpEN On Default On Off O At a voltage dip the low voltage trip will protect At mains dip VSD ramps down until voltage On 1 rises Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43361 Profibus slot index 170 10 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt DC link voltage Override level Low Volt ss level pessksERes rari sala Fi ewe te ames aie eS iui db aise du RE i Speed t 06 F60new t Fig 87 Low voltage override NOTE During the low voltage override the LED trip limit blinks Functional Description 107 Rotor locked 422 With the rotor locked function enabled the VSD will pro tect the motor and application when this is stalled whilst increasing the motor speed from standstill This protection will coast the motor to stop and indicate a fault when the Torque Limit has been active at very low speed for more than 5 seconds 422 Rotor locked StpFA Off Default Off Off O No detection On 1 VSD will trip when locked rotor is detected Trip message Locked Rotor Communication information Overvolt control 424 Used to switch off the overvoltage control function when only braking by brake chopper and resistor is required The overvoltage control function limits the braking
27. 3 000 bar Anln1 Operation 5138 5138 AnIn1 Oper StpEN Add Default Add Add o Analogue signal is added to selected func tion in menu 511 Sub 1 Analogue signal is subtracted from selected function in menu 511 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43208 Profibus slot index 169 112 Fieldbus format UInt Modbus format UInt Anln1 Filter 5139 If the input signal is unstable e g fluctuation reference value the filter can be used to stabilize the signal A change of the input signal will reach 63 on AnIn1 within the set AnIn1 Filter time After 5 times the set time AnIn1 will have reached 100 of the input change See Fig 92 5139 AnInl Filt StpFA 0 1s Default 0 1s Range 0 001 10 0s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43209 Profibus slot index 169 113 Fieldbus format Long 120 001 s Modbus format EInt Anin change Original input signal 100 77777 7 77 Filtered Anin signal 63 Fig 92 AnlIn1 Enable 513A Parameter for enable disable analogue input selection via digital inputs Digln set to function AnlIn Select 513A AnIn1 Enabl StpEN On Default On On O Anln1 is always active IDigln 1 Anln1 is only active if the digital input is low Digln 2 Anln1 is only active if the digital input is
28. 800 View TripLog 810 Trip Message 811 Process Value 812 Speed 813 Torque 814 Shaft Power 815 Electrical Power 816 Current 817 Output voltage 818 Frequency 819 DC Link voltage 81A Heatsink Tmp 81B PT100_1 2 3 81C FI Status 81D Digln status 81E DigOut status 81F Anin status 1 2 81G Anln status 3 4 DEFAULT CUSTOM 81H AnOut status 1 2 81l 10 Status B1 81 10 Status B2 81K 10 Status B3 81L Run Time 81M Mains Time 81N Energy 820 Trip Message 821 Process Value 822 Speed 823 Torque 824 Shaft Power 825 Electrical Power 826 Current 827 Output voltage 828 Frequency 829 DC Link voltage 82A Heatsink Tmp 82B PT100_1 2 3 82C FI Status 82D Digln status 82b DigOut status 82F Anin status 12 82G Anin status 3 4 82H _ AnOut status 1 2 821 10 Status B1 825 10 Status B2 82K _ 10 Status B3 82L Run Time 82M Mains Time 82N Energy 830 831 Process Value 832 Speed 833 Torque 834 Shaft Power 835 Electrical Power 836 Current 837 Output voltage 838 Frequency 839 DC Link voltage 83A Heatsink Temperature 83B PT100_1 2 3 83C FI Status 83D Digln status 83E DigOut status 83F Anin status 12 83G Alnstatus 3 4 83H AnOut status 1 2 831 IO Status B1 83J 10 Status B2 83K IO Status B3 83L Ru
29. EInt Reset Energy 7331 Resets the kWh counter The stored information will be erased and a new registration period will start 7331 Rst Energy stp No Default No Selection No Yes Communication information 11 8 View Trip Log 800 Main menu with parameters for viewing all the logged trip data In total the VSD saves the last 10 trips in the trip memory The trip memory refreshes on the FIFO principle First In First Out Every trip in the memory is logged on the time of the Run Time 731 counter At every trip the actual values of several parameter are stored and available for troubleshooting 11 8 1 Trip Message log 810 Display the cause of the trip and what time that it occurred When a trip occurs the status menus are cop ied to the trip message log There are nine trip message logs 810 890 When the tenth trip occurs the oldest trip will disappear 8x0 Trip message Stp h mm ss Unit h m hours minutes Oh Om 65355h 59m Range 810 Ext Trip Stp 132 12 14 For fieldbus integer value of trip message see mes sage table for warnings 722 NOTE Bits 0 5 used for trip message value Bits 6 15 for internal use Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 6 Profibus slot index 0 5 Communication information Fieldbus format UlInt Medb s format Ulnt Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 31101 Profibus slot index
30. NOTE For bipol function input RunR and RunL needs to be active and Rotation 219 must be set to R L NOTE Always check the needed set up when the setting of S1 is changed selection will not adapt automatically Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43202 Profibus slot index 169 106 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Speed n gt gt NG_06 F21 Fig 88 110 Functional Description 100 t 0 10V i 0 20 ma Ref o 10V 20mA NG_O6 F21 Fig 89 Normal full scale configuration 100 i 2 10V 4 20 mA Ref o 2V 10V 4mA 20mA Fig 90 2 10 V 4 20 mA Live Zero Anln1 Advanced 513 NOTE The different menus will automatically be set to either mA or V based on the selection in Anin 1 Setup 512 513 AnInl Advan StpEA Anln1 Min 5131 Parameter to set the minimum value of the external ref erence signal Only visible if 512 User mA V 5131 AnIn1 Min StpEA 0V 4 00mA Default O V 4 00 mA 0 00 20 00 mA Range 0 10 00 V Anln1 Max 5132 Parameter to set the maximum value of the external reference signal Only visible if 512 User mA V 5132 AnIn1 Max Stp 10 0V 20 00mA Default 10 00 V 20 00 mA En 0 00 20 00 mA ge 0 10 00 V Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNe
31. Second environment Standard EMC includes all other establishments Category C3 PDS of rated voltage 1 000 V intended for use in the second environment and not intended for use in the first environment Category C4 PDS or rated voltage equal or above 1 000 V or rated current equal to or above 400 A or intended for use in complex systems in the second envi ronment The variable speed drive complies with the product standard EN IEC 61800 3 2004 Any kind of metal screened cable may be used The standard variable speed drive is designed to meet the requirements according to cat egory C3 By using the optional Extended EMC filter the VSD ful fils requirements according to category C2 WARNING In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case it may be necessary to take adequate additional measures Position Position for for 0003 0060 Configuration 0046 1500 3 3 Rated current A ds A continuous 1500 1500 A 20 1P20 4 4 Protection class 5A P54 Blank panel 5 5 Control panel C Standard panel E Standard EMC Category C3 6 6 EMC option F Extended EMC Category C2 I IT Net No chopper 7 7 i ded B Chopper built in p D DC interface 8 8 Stand by power sup No SBS ply option S SBS included Safe stop option No safe stop 9 Not valid for T Safe stop incl 0003 0046 Only 0090 1500 9 10 Brand label Painted VSD A Standard
32. 0 Range O 4 x Motor Sync speed Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43188 Profibus slot index 169 92 Fieldbus format Int Modbus format Int Deviation Time 3AC To set the time during which the deviation condition must be active before the inverter trips 3AC Dev Time StpFA S Default 0 10 s Range 0 05 1s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43192 Profibus slot index 169 96 Fieldbus format Long 120 001 s Modbus format EInt LAFS Load 3AD To set the load below which the VFB V33 goes into load dependent field weakening operation 3AD LAFS Load StpFAX Off Default Off Off 0 Off 1 100 1 100 196 100 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43193 Profibus slot index 169 97 Fieldbus format Long 1 196 Modbus format EInt 102 Functional Description When set to OFF the load dependent field weakening function is switched off 11 4 Load Monitor and Process Protection 400 11 4 1 Load Monitor 410 The monitor functions enable the VSD to be used as a load monitor Load monitors are used to protect machines and processes against mechanical overload and underload e g a conveyer belt or screw conveyer jamming belt failure on a fan and a pump dry running See explanation in section 7 5 page 38 Alarm Sele
33. 200 The Main Setup menu contains the most important set tings to get the VSD operational and set up for the application It includes different sub menus concerning the control of the unit motor data and protection utili ties and automatic resetting of faults This menu will instantaneously be adapted to build in options and show the required settings 11 2 1 Operation 210 Selections concerning the used motor VSD mode con trol signals and serial communication are described in this submenu and is used to set the VSD up for the application Language 211 Select the language used on the LC Display Once the language is set this selection will not be affected by the Load Default command 211 Language StpRN English Default English English O0 English selected Svenska 1 Swedish selected Nederlands 2 Dutch selected Deutsch 3 German selected Francais 4 French selected Espanol 5 Spanish selected Pycckun 6 Russian selected Italiano 7 Italian selected Cesky 8 Czech selected Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43011 Profibus slot index 168 170 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Select Motor 212 This menu is used if you have more than one motor in your application Select the motor to define It is possi ble to define up to four different motors M1 to M4 in the VSD 212 Select Motor StpfN
34. 3 LSB Non linearity 2 LSB Digital Output voltage High gt 20 VDC 50 mA gt 23 VDC open Shortcircuit current oo Low 1 VDC 950 mA 100 mA max together with 24 VDC Relays Contacts 0 1 2 A Ugg 250 VAC or 42 VDC References 10VDC 10 Vpc 910 mA Short circuit current 30 mA max 10VDC 10 Voc 910 mA 24VDC 24 Vpc Short circuit current 100 mA max together with Digital Outputs Technical Data 161 14 3 Operation at higher temperatures Most TECO variable speed drives are made for opera tion at maximum of 40 C ambient temperature How ever for most models it is possible to use the VSD at higher temperatures with little loss in performance Table 44 shows ambient temperatures as well as derat ing for higher temperatures Table 44 Ambient temperature and derating 400 690 V types JNVX69 0210 to JNVX69 1000 IP20 IP54 Model Max temp Derating possible Max temp Derating possible JNVX 0003 to JNVX 0046 40 C Yes 2 5 C to max 10 C JNVX 0060 to JNVX40 0073 40 C Yes 2 5 C to max 10 C 35 C Yes 2 5 C to max 10 C JNVX48 0090 to JNVX48 0250 40 C Yes 2 5 C to max 5 C JNVX69 0090 to JNVX48 0175 JNVX48 0300 to JNVX48 1500 40 C 2 5 C to max 5 C 40 C 2 5 C to max 5 C Example In this example we have a motor with the following data that we want to run at the ambient temperature of 45 C
35. Communication information 39H1 Rst Run Tml Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43181 StpEX No Profibus slot index 169 85 Default No Fieldbus format Ulnt No 0 Modbus format Ulnt Yes 1 Control 3A2 Communication information To select the type of crane joystick control Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 38 43 pump 1 6 3A2 Control Profibus slot index 0 37 0 42 StpfA 4 Speeds Fieldbus format UInt Default 4 Speeds Modbus format UInt 4 Speeds O 4 Speed joystick 3 Pos 1 3 Position switch Pump Status 39N Analogue 2 Analogue joystick 39N Pump 123456 StpFEA OCD Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43182 Indication Description Profibus slot index 169 86 C Control master pump only when alternating Fieldbus format Ulnt master is used Modbus format Ulnt D Direct control Pump is off E Pump error 100 Functional Description Crane Relay CR1 3A3 Crane Relay CR1 on the Crane option board is fixed to the No Trip function 3A3 Crane Relayl StpFN No Trip Default No Trip Selections Fixed to No Trip Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43185 Profibus slot index 169 89 Fieldbus format Int 121 rpm Modbus format Int 121 rpm Crawl speed H R 3A6 Comm
36. Default 10 Range 0 100 of total min speed to max speed 96 Functional Description Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43168 Profibus slot index 169 72 Fieldbus format Long 1 196 Modbus format EInt Example Max Speed 1500 rpm Min Speed 300 rpm Lower Band 10 Stop delay will be activated Range Max Speed Min Speed 1500 300 1200 rpm 10 of 1200 rpm 120 rpm Start level 300 120 420 rpm Speed Max eoo ee E Min Tesar EA E Flow Pressure Stop Delay 39A NG 50 PC 13 1 Fig 79 Lower band Start Delay 399 This delay time must have elapsed before the next pump is started A delay time prevents the nervous switching of pumps 399 Start Delay StpfN 0s Default Os Range 0 999 s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43169 Profibus slot index 169 73 Fieldbus format Long 1 1s Modbus format EInt Stop Delay 39A This delay time must have elapsed before the top pump is stopped A delay time prevents the nervous switching of pumps 39A Stop Delay StpfN 0s Default Os Range 0 999 s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43170 Profibus slot index 169 74 Fieldbus format Long 1 1s Modbus format EInt Upper Band Limit 39B If the spe
37. Industrial Ethernet type Modbus TCP 10 1 Modbus RTU The VSD has an asynchronous serial communication interface behind the control panel The protocol used for data exchange is based in the Modbus RTU protocol originally developed by Modicon the physical connec tion is RS232 The VSD acts as a slave with address 1 in a master slave configuration The communication is half duplex It has a standard no return zero NRZ for mat The baud rate is fixed to 9600 The character frame format always 11 bits has one start bit eight data bits two stop bits no parity It is possible to temporarily connect a personal compu ter with for example the software EmoSoftCom pro gramming and monitoring software to the RS232 connector on the control panel This can be useful when copying parameters between variable speed drives etc For permanent connection of a personal computer you have to use one of the communication option boards Fig 55 Mounting frame for the control panel 10 2 Parameter sets Communication information for the different parameter sets The different parameter sets in the VSD have the follow ing DeviceNet instance numbers and Profibus slot index numbers Parameter Modbus DeviceNet Profibus set Instance number Slot Index A 43001 43556 168 160 to 170 205 B 44001 44529 172 140 to 174 185 C 45001 45529 176 120 to 178 165 D 46001 46529 180 100 to 182 145
38. JNVX40 48 230 480 V JNVX50 52 440 525 V JNVX69 500 690 V Voltage tests Megger Do not carry out voltage tests Megger on the motor before all the motor cables have been disconnected from the variable speed drive Condensation If the variable speed drive is moved from a cold stor age room to a room where it will be installed conden sation can occur This can result in sensitive components becoming damp Do not connect the mains voltage until all visible dampness has evapo rated Incorrect connection The variable speed drive is not protected against incor rect connection of the mains voltage and in particular against connection of the mains voltage to the motor outlets U V and W The variable speed drive can be damaged in this way Power factor capacitors for improving COSQ Remove all capacitors from the motor and the motor outlet Precautions during Autoreset When the automatic reset is active the motor will restart automatically provided that the cause of the trip has been removed If necessary take the appropriate precautions Transport To avoid damage keep the variable speed drive in its original packaging during transport This packaging is specially designed to absorb shocks during transport IT Mains supply The variable speed drives can be modified for an IT mains supply non earthed neutral please contact your supplier for details Heat warning Be aware of specific part
39. Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43112 Profibus slot index 169 16 Fieldbus format Long 120 01 s Modbus format EInt Fig 67 shows the relation between the four Brake func tions Brake Release Time 33C Start Speed 33D Brake Engage Time 33E Brake Wait Time 33F The correct time setting depends on the maximum load and the properties of the mechanical brake During the brake release time it is possible to apply extra holding torque by setting a start speed reference with the func tion start speed 33D Functional Description 83 Brake release n time 33C Start Release Speed 33D Mechanical Brake Brake Relay On Brake wait time 33F Brake engage time 33E Output i E Action must take place within i these time intervals Fig 67 Brake Output functions NOTE Although this function is designed to operate a mechanical brake via the digital outputs or relays set to brake function controlling a mechanical brake it can also be used without a mechanical brake and hold the load in a fixed position Release Speed 33D The release speed only operates with the brake func tion brake release 33C The release speed is the ini tial speed reference during the brake release time The torque reference is initialized to 90 of Tyom to ensure that the load is held in place 33D Release Spd Brake Engage Time 33E The brake engage time is the time the
40. Reference priority 34 Preset references sccssccssessssssssseesseesesseeeseeeaees 35 Remote control functions esses 35 Performing an Identification Run 37 Using the Control Panel Memory 37 Load Monitor and Process Protection 400 38 Load Monitor 410 sess 38 EMC and Machine Directive 39 EMG standards uiii ea ieu ee te vae 39 Stop categories and emergency stop 39 Operation via the Control Panel 41 CI IE voice Ae Re ee 41 The control panel eese 41 Th amp display a A a 41 Indications on the display eeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 42 LED indicators rettet Een 42 Control K6ys seeded e RC eet 42 The Toggle and Loc Rem Key sss 42 Function keys The menu structure The Main meh aote outer 44 Programming during operation 44 Editing values in a menu sees 44 9 6 Copy current parameter to all sets 45 9 7 Programming example eese 45 10 Serial communication 47 10 1 Modb s RTU 1 ott t 47 10 2 Parameter sets oeste ritenere ener 47 10 3 Motor data erre rer eer nera ens 48 10 4 Start and stop commands ssessssss 48 10 5 Reference sigial iu urne e
41. inputs and outputs 7 1 4 Autoreset at trip For several non critical application related failure condi tions it is possible to automatically generate a reset command to overcome the fault condition The selec tion can be made in menu 250 In this menu the max imum number of automatically generated restarts allowed can be set see menu 251 after this the VSD will stay in fault condition because external assistance is required Example The motor is protected by an internal protection for ther mal overload When this protection is activated the VSD should wait until the motor is cooled down enough before resuming normal operation When this problem occurs three times in a short period of time external assistance is required The following settings should be applied nsert maximum number of restarts set menu 251 to 3 e Activate Motor I t to be automatically reset set menu 25A to 300 s Setrelay 1 menu 551 to AutoRst Trip a signal will be available when the maximum number of restarts is reached and the VSD stays in fault condition The reset input must be constantly activated 7 1 5 Reference priority The active speed reference signal can be programmed from several sources and functions The table below shows the priority of the different functions with regards to the speed reference Table 18 Reference priority ea E num Motor Pot Ref Signal On Off On Off On Off Option cards On On O
42. is not copied or Torque 2 Torque as process reference loaded from the control panel memory when Copy Set PT100 3 Temperature as process reference 242 Copy to CP 244 or Load from CP 245 is F Speed 4 Function of speed performed F Torque 5 Function of torque NOTE If the MotPot function is used the reference value F Bus 6 FHDEHOR OF communication rererence ramp times are according to the Acc MotPot 333 and Frequency 7 Frequency as process reference Dec MotPot 334 settings Actual speed ramp will be limited according to Acc Time 331 and Dec Time 332 11 3 2 Process Settings 320 With these functions the VSD can be set up to fit the application The menus 110 120 310 362 368 and 711 use the process unit selected in 321 and 322 for the application e g rpm bar or m3 h This makes it possible to easily set up the VSD for the required process requirements as well as for copying the range of a feedback sensor to set up the Process Value Minimum and Maximum in order to establish accurate actual process information Process Source 321 Select the signal source for the process value that con trols the motor The Process Source can be set to act as a function of the process signal on Anln F Anln a func tion of the motor speed F Speed a function of the shaft torque F Torque or as a function of a process value from serial communication F Bus The right func tion to select de
43. minutes in Run time 830 Over temp Stp 1396h 13m Fig 106 Trip 3 11 8 2 Trip Messages 820 890 Same information as for menu 810 Communication information Trip log list 31151 31185 31201 31235 31251 31285 31301 31335 31351 31385 31401 31435 31451 31485 31501 31535 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no Qo 0o0 5 0N Trip log list 122 40 122 74 122 90 122 124 122 140 122 174 122 190 122 224 122 240 123 18 123 35 123 68 123 85 123 118 123 135 123 168 Profibus slot index ONOoaRWHND oO Depends on parameter see respec Fieldbus format tive parameter Depends on parameter see respec Modbus format i tive parameter All nine alarm lists contain the same type of data For example DeviceNet parameter 31101 in alarm list 1 contains the same data information as 31151 in alarm list 2 It is possible to read all parameters in alarm lists 2 9 by recalculating the DeviceNet instance number into a Profibus slot index number This is done in the following way slot no abs dev instance no 1 255 index no dev instance no 1 modulo 255 dev instance no slot nox255 index no 1 Example We want to read out the process value out from alarm list 9 In alarm list 1 process value has the DeviceNet instance number 31102 In alarm list 9 it has DeviceNet instance no 31502 see table 2 above The corresponding slot index no is then slot no abs 31502 1 255 123
44. the alarm will be reset if the function is active Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43074 Profibus slot index 168 233 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt 25E PTC StpFA Off Default Off Off 0 Off 1 3600 1 3600 1 3600 s PT100 25C Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone When the time delay has elapsed the alarm will be reset if the function is active 25C PT100 Stp Off Default Off Off 0 Off 1 3600 1 3600 1 3600 s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43084 Profibus slot index 168 243 Fieldbus format Long 1721s Modbus format EInt Functional Description 69 PTC Trip Type 25F Select the preferred way to react to a PTC trip Communication Error 251 Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone When the time delay has elapsed the alarm will be reset if the function is active 25I Com Error StpEN Off Default Off Off 0 Off 1 3600 1 3600 1 3600 s Communication information 25F PTC TT StpEN Trip Default Trip Selection Same as menu 25B Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43085 Profibus slot index 168 244 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt External Trip 25G Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone When the time delay has elapsed the
45. the menu 245 Load from CP and select what you want to copy The memory in the control panel is useful in applica tions with VSDs without a control panel and in applica tions where several variable speed drives have the same setup It can also be used for temporary storage of settings Use a control panel to upload the settings from one VSD and then move the control panel to another VSD and download the settings NOTE Load from and copy to the VSD is only possible when the VSD is in stop mode VSD a Ses Fig 43 Copy and load parameters between VSD and control panel Main Features 37 7 5 Load Monitor and Process Protection 400 7 5 1 Load Monitor 410 The monitor functions enable the VSD to be used as a load monitor Load monitors are used to protect machines and processes against mechanical overload and underload such as a conveyer belt or screw con veyer jamming belt failure on a fan or a pump dry run ning The load is measured in the VSD by the calculated motor shaft torque There is an overload alarm Max Alarm and Max Pre Alarm and an underload alarm Min Alarm and Min Pre Alarm The Basic Monitor type uses fixed levels for overload and underload pre alarms over the whole speed range This function can be used in constant load appli cations where the torque is not dependent on the speed e g conveyor belt displacement pump screw pump etc For applications with a torque
46. trip on Motor It This mode helps to keep the inverter run ning when the Motor I2t function is just before tripping the VSD The trip is replaced by current limiting with a maxi mum current level set by the value out of the menu 232 In this way if the reduced current can drive the load the VSD contin ues running Limit 2 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43061 Profibus slot index 168 220 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Umnt NOTE When Mot I2t Type Limit the VSD can control the speed lt MinSpeed to reduce the motor current Motor I t Current 232 Sets the current limit for the motor I t protection 232 Mot I t Curr StpFA 1005 Default 100 of Imor Range 0 150 of Imot Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43062 Profibus slot index 168 221 Functional Description 61 Fieldbus format Long 1 196 Default 60s Modbus format EInt Range 60 1200s NOTE When the selection Limit is set in menu 231 the value must be above the no load current of the motor Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43063 Motor l t Time 233 Profibus slot index 168 222 Sets the time of the I t function After this time the limit Fieldbus format Long 1 1
47. 1 5 3 2 5 3 3 5 3 4 5 4 5 4 1 5 4 2 5 4 3 5 4 4 5 4 5 6 1 6 1 1 6 1 2 6 1 3 6 1 4 7 1 7 1 1 7 1 2 7 1 3 7 1 4 7 1 5 7 1 6 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 5 1 8 1 8 2 9 1 9 2 9 2 1 9 2 2 9 2 3 9 2 4 9 2 5 9 2 6 9 3 9 3 1 9 4 9 5 Connect the mains and motor cables 27 Mains Cables raneren ae eani Motor cables Using the function keys eese Remote control vis erret ete annie Connect control cables esses Switch on the mains cesses Set the Motor Data sess R n tlie VSD raids eni tocaba cnin ds Local Control erret Hen ETE naa Switch on the mains essen Select manual control esses Set the Motor Data Enter a Reference Value R hithie VOD ec ieccveitdecebece edt eee ae Applications e cerrer nenne 31 Application overview MEC GIANES c don ar e dde eead 31 CI ShGIS 3e o e end 31 MIIIS ca cit t e E essa 32 MIXGIS o terere e ror iri ru eroe EET 32 Main Features c ceeeseeeeees 33 Parameter SGES iyinin miaa ee me Te deae 33 One motor and one parameter set 34 One motor and two parameter sets 34 Two motors and two parameter sets 34 Autoreset at trip eoi trente t eie hne En EUR Reuse 34
48. 121 245 NOTE After reset the setting automatically goes back to Fieldbus format UInt No Modbus format UlInt Trip message 811 81N The information from the status menus are copied to the trip message log when a trip occurs Trip menu Copied from Description 811 711 Process Value 812 712 Speed 813 712 Torque 814 714 Shaft Power 815 715 Electrical Power 816 716 Current 140 Functional Description Trip menu Copied from Description 817 717 Output voltage 818 718 Frequency 819 719 DC Link voltage 81A TAA Heatsink Temperature 81B 71B PT100_1 2 3 81C 721 VSD Status 81D 723 Digital input status 81E 724 Digital output status 81F 725 Analogue input status 1 2 81G 726 Analogue input status 3 4 81H 727 Analogue output status 1 2 81l 728 O status option board 1 81J 729 I O status option board 2 81K 72A I O status option board 3 81L 731 Run Time 81M 732 Mains Time 81N 733 Energy 810 310 Process reference Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 31102 31135 121 246 254 Profibus slot index 122 0 24 Depends on parameter See respective parame ter Fieldbus format Depends on parameter see respective parame ter Modbus format Example Fig 106 shows the third trip memory menu 830 Over temperature trip occurred after 1396 hours and 13
49. 2 T1 0 00 00 Default 0 00 00 hr min sec Range 0 00 00 9 59 59 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43451 Profibus slot index 170 100 Fieldbus format UInt Modbus format Ulnt Timer 2 Mode 652 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43456 hours 43457 minutes 43458 seconds Profibus slot index 170 105 170 106 170 107 652 Timer2 Mode Fieldbus format UInt Modbus format UInt StpFEA Off Default Off Selection Same as in menu 642 Functional Description 133 Timer 2 T2 655 StpEN 655 Timer 2 T2 0 00 00 Default 0 00 00 hr min sec Range 0 00 00 9 59 59 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43459 hours 43460 minutes 43461 seconds 11 7 View Operation Status 700 Menu with parameters for viewing all actual operational data such as speed torque power etc 11 7 1 Operation 710 Process Value 711 The process value is a display function which can be programmed according to several quantities and units related to the reference value Profibus slot index 170 108 170 109 170 110 Fieldbus format UInt Modbus format UInt Timer 2 Value 659 Timer 2 Value shows actual value of the timer 659 Timer2 Value StpEA 0 00 00 Default 0 00 00 hr min
50. 345 x 314 74 0300 to 0375 G 1036 x 500 x 390 2330 x 600 x 500 140 270 0430 to 0500 H 1036 x 500 x 450 2330 x 600 x 600 170 305 0600 to 0750 1036 x 730 x 450 2330 x 1000 x 600 248 440 o860to1000 J 1036x1100x450 X 2830x1200x600 340 580 1200 to 1500 K 1036 x 1560 x 450 2330 x 2000 x 600 496 860 Table 6 Mechanical specifications J NVX69 Models Frame Dim H x W x D mm Dim H x W x D mm Weight IP20 Weight IP54 size IP20 IP54 kg kg 0090 to 0175 F69 1090 x 345 x 314 77 0210 to 0375 H69 1176 x 500 x 450 2330 x 600 x 600 176 311 0430 to 0500 169 1176 x 730 x 450 2330 x 1000 x 600 257 449 0600 to 0650 J69 1176 x 1100 x 450 2330 x 1200 x 600 352 592 0750 to 1000 K69 1176 x 1560 x 450 2330 x 2000 x 600 514 878 Technical Data 163 14 5 Environmental conditions Table 47 Operation Parameter Normal operation Nominal ambient temperature 0 C 40 C See table see Table 44 for different conditions Atmospheric pressure 86 106 kPa Relative humidity non condensing 0 90 Contamination according to IEC 60721 3 3 No electrically conductive dust allowed Cooling air must be clean and free from corro sive materials Chemical gases class 3C2 Solid particles class 3S2 According to IEC 600068 2 6 Sinusodial vibrations Vibrations e 10 lt f lt 57 Hz 0 075 mm 57 f 150 Hz 1g Altitude 0 1000 m with derating 196 100 m of rated current up to 2000 m Table 48 S
51. 41C2 Load Curve 2 10096 51A Anln4 Fc Off 41C3 Load Curve 3 10096 51B Anln4 Setup 4 20mA 41C4 Load Curve 4 100 51C Anln4 Advan 41C5 Load Curve 5 10096 51C1 Anin4 Min 4mA 41c6 loadCuve 6 100 51C2 Anin4 Max 20 00mA 41C7 Load Curve 7 100 51C3 Anin4 Bipol 20 00mA 41C8 Load Curve 8 10096 51C4 Anln4 FcMin Min a1c9 toadCuve9 10 51C5 Anin4 ValMin 0 420 Process Prot 51C6 Anln4 FcMax Max 421 Low Volt OR On 51C7 Anln4 ValMax o 422 Rotor Locked off 51C8 Anin4 Oper Add 423 Motor lost Off 51C9 Anln4 Filt 0 1s 424 Overvolt Ctrl On 51CA Anin4 Enabl On 500 l Os 520 Dig Inputs 510 An Inputs 521 Digln 1 RunL 511 Anln1 Fc Process Ref 522 Digln 2 RunR 512 anniSetup 420m T 523 Digin3 Off 513 AnIn1 Advn 524 Digin 4 Off 5131 Anln1 Min 4mA 525 Digln 5 Off 5132 AnIn1 Max 20 00mA 526 Digin6 Off Menu List 173 DEFAULT CUSTOM DEFAULT CUSTOM 527 Digln 7 Of 55D6 B1R3 Mode N O 528 Digln 8 Reset 55D7 B2R1 Mode N O 529 B oard 1 Digln 1 Of 55D8 B2R2 Mode N O 52A B oard 1 Digln 2 Of 55D9 B2R3 Mo
52. Acc Acceleration Dec Deceleration It Active I7t protection Run Motor runs Trp Tripped Stp Motor is stopped VL Operating at Voltage limit SL Operating at Speed limit CL Operating at Current limit TL Operating at Torque limit OT Operating at Temperature Limit LV Operating at Low Voltage Sby Operating from Standby power supply SST Operating Safe Stop is blinking when activated LCL Operating with low cooling liquid level Area E Shows active parameter set and if it is a motor parameter Area F Shows the setting or selection in the active menu This area is empty at the 1st level and 2nd level menu This area also shows warn ings and alarm messages 300 Process Appl Stp Fig 46 Example 1st level menu 220 Motor Data Stp Fig 47 Example 2nd level menu 221 Motor Volt StpEAMI 400V Fig 48 Example 3d level menu 4161 Max Alarm StpFA 0 1s Fig 49 Example 4th level menu Operation via the Control Panel 41 9 2 2 Indications on the display The display can indicate or if a parameter is out of range In the VSD there are parameters which are dependent on other parameters For example if the speed reference is 500 and the maximum speed value is set to a value below 500 this will be indicated with on the display If the minimum speed value is set over 500 is displayed 9 2 3 LED indicators The symbols on the control panel have the following functions
53. Default 5 2 aiae t ee 65 Definitions esses 8 Derating ees 162 Digital comparators 124 Digital inputs Board Relay 122 Diglride ertet 115 DiglIi 2t oett ent 116 Dilli Siskind ames 116 Dismantling and scrapping 7 Display cc eene 41 Double ended connection 25 Drive Mode iere teens 54 Frequengy seesssss 109 Drives on Change 95 96 E do E 151 Edge control 36 57 Electrical specification 161 Ed 16 Current control O 20mA 26 Double ended connection 25 RFI mains filter 16 Single ended connection 25 Twisted cables 26 Emergency stop 39 EN60204 1 5 neta 7 EN619800 3 estende is 7 EN61800 5 1 sere 7 Enable coorta 35 42 115 EXOR operator s 128 EXDIGSSIOTIL nicer ro tete o neon eus 128 External Control Panel 151 F Factory settings 65 FANS p D 94 Fi ldDUs fated icici 73 153 Fixed MASTER 94 95 Flux optimization 88 Frequehloy ei id e 134 Frequency priority 34 Jog Frequengy 87 Maximum Frequency 85 86 Minimum Frequency 85 Preset Frequency
54. Diging The positions one to eight read from left to right indi cate the status of the associated input 1 High O Low The example in Fig 101 indicates that Digln 1 Digln 3 and Digln 6 are active at this moment 723 DigIn Status Stp 1010 0100 Fig 101 Digital input status example Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 31017 Profibus slot index 121 161 Fieldbus foriat Ulnt bit O Digln1 bit Modbus format 8 Digln8 Digital Output Status 724 Indicates the status of the digital outputs and relays See Fig 102 RE indicate the status of the relays on position 1 Relay1 2 Relay2 3 Relay3 DO indicate the status of the digital outputs on position 1 DigOut1 2 DigOut2 The status of the associated output is shown 1 High O Low Functional Description 137 The example in Fig 102 indicates that DigOut1 is active and Digital Out 2 is not active Relay 1 is active relay 2 and 3 are not active 724 DigOutStatus Stp RE 100 DO 10 Fig 102Digital output status example Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 31018 Profibus slot index 121 162 Fieldbus format Ulnt bit O DigOut1 bit 1 DigOut2 bit 8 Relay1 bit 9 Relay2 bit 10 Relay3 Modbus format Analogue Input Status 725 Indicates the status of the analogue inputs 1 and 2 725 Anin 1 2 Stp 100 65 Fig 103 Analogue input status Comm
55. Directive 39 40 EMC and Machine Directive 9 Operation via the Control Panel This chapter describes how to use the control panel Area A The VSD can be delivered with a control panel or a blank panel 9 1 General The control panel displays the status of the VSD and is used to set all the parameters It is also possible to con trol the motor directly from the control panel The con trol panel can be built in or located externally via serial communication The VSD can be ordered without the control panel Instead of the control panel there will be a blank panel NOTE The VSD can run without the control panel being connected However the settings must be such that all control signals are set for external use 9 2 The control panel lt LC Display a LEDs a Control Keys q Toggle Key Function Keys Fig 44 Control panel 9 2 1 The display The display is back lit and consists of 2 rows each with space for 16 characters The display is divided into six areas The different areas in the display are described below A B C 221 Motor Volt StpryM1 1 400V D E F Fig 45 The display Shows the actual menu number 3 or 4 digits AreaB Shows if the menu is in the toggle loop or the VSD is set for Local operation Area C Shows the heading of the active menu AreaD Shows the status of the VSD 3 digits The following status indications are possi ble
56. EN 10 Mounting schemes us d Cabinet mounting essent 13 Cooling iini c ne eiectus 13 Mounting schemes eene 13 Installation e 15 Before installation eese 15 Cable connections for 0003 to 0073 15 Mains Cable epD 15 Motor Cables sec s sicscesecvdsissctneseceesessetdarcvensterdesewsceeuss 16 Connect motor and mains cables for 0090 to 1500 18 Cable specifications eese 19 Stripping lengths essen 19 Dimension of cables and fuses 19 Tightening torque for mains and motor cables 19 Thermal protection on the motor 20 Motors in parallel eeeeseeeceseeeeeee 20 Control Connections 21 Control Doatd uas giu 21 Terminal connections essssessss 22 Inputs configuration with the switches 22 Connection example sss Connecting the Control Signals Cable 4 auis Types of control signals Screening teet ed apii Single ended or double ended connection 25 Current signals 0 4 20 m4A esses 26 Twisted cableS erret eiie eere arius eres 26 Connecting options sese 26 Getting Started 27 5 1 5 1 1 5 1 2 5 2 5 3 5 3
57. In case of malfunctioning always check the DC link voltage or wait one hour after the mains voltage has been switched off before dismantling the VSD for repair WARNING If it is necessary to open the VSD or any part of the system motor cable housing conduits electrical panels cabinets etc to inspect or take measure ments as suggested in this instruction manual it is absolutely necessary to read and follow the safety instructions in the manual The connections for the control signals and the switches are isolated from the mains voltage Always take adequate precautions before opening the variable speed drive 12 2 3 Precautions to take with a connected motor If work must be carried out on a connected motor or on the driven machine the mains voltage must always first be disconnected from the variable speed drive Wait at least 5 minutes before continuing 12 2 4 Autoreset Trip If the maximum number of Trips during Autoreset has been reached the trip message hour counter is marked with an A 830 OVERVOLT G Trp A 345 45 12 Fig 108 Autoreset trip Fig 108 shows the 3rd trip memory menu 830 Over voltage G trip after the maximum Autoreset attempts took place after 345 hours 45 minutes and 12 sec onds of run time 146 Troubleshooting Diagnoses and Maintenance Table 31 Trip condition their possible causes and remedial action Trip condition Possible Cause Remedy Motor
58. MotPot Up Timer 1 24 Timer 1 Delay 643 will be activated on the rising edge of this signal Timer 2 22 Timer 2 Delay 653 will be activated on the rising edge of this signal Set Ctrl 4 23 Activates other parameter set See Table 26 for selection possibilities Set Ctrl 2 24 Activates other parameter set See Table 26 for selection possibilities Pre magnetises the motor Used for faster Mot PreMag 25 motor start NOTE To activate the parameter set selection menu 241 must be set to Digln Digital Input 2 522 to Digital Input 8 528 Same function as Digln 1 521 Default function for Digln 8 is Reset For Digln 3 to 7 the default function is Off 522 DigIn 2 StpEN RunR Default RunR Selection Same as in menu 521 Communication information To activate the Jog function Gives a Run Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43241 43248 Profibus slot index 169 146 169 152 Fieldbus format UlInt Modbus format UInt Jog 26 command with the set Jog speed and Direction page 87 Be aware that if there is nothing connected Ext Mot to the input the VSD will trip at External 27 Motor Temp immediately Temp NOTE The External Motor Temp is active low Activate local mode defined in 2171 and Loc Rem 28 2172 Additional digital inputs 529 to 52H Additional digital inputs with I O option board installed B1 Digln 1 529
59. Only used in Crane Control ibd edd peselected que een Check cables and wiring for Pump feedback signals Pump 8 amp Check settings with regard to the pump feedback NOTE Only used in Pump Control digital inputs Heatsink temperature too high checkte cooling of me ne cabinet 2 Check the functionality of the built in fans The fans Too high ambient temperature of the f i VSD must switch on automatically if the heatsink tempera Over temp m ture gets too high At power up the fans are briefly Insufficient cooling Too high current switehedon iBlocked orit tted fans Check VSD and motor rating Clean fans Motor current exceeds the peak VSD current Check the acceleration time settings and Too short acceleration time make them longer if necessary Too high motor load Check the motor load Excessive load change Check on bad motor cable connections Over curr F Soft short circuit between phases or phase to earth Poor or loose motor cable connections Too high IxR Compensation level Check on bad earth cable connection Check on water or moisture in the motor housing and cable connections Lower the level of IXR Compensation 352 Over volt D eceleration Over volt G enerator Too high DC Link voltage Too short deceleration time with respect to motor machine inertia Too small brake resistor malfunctioning Brake chopper Check the deceleration time settings a
60. Output voltage 87D Digln status 858 Frequency 87E DigOut status 859 DC Link voltage 87F Anin status 1 2 85A Heatsink Tmp 87G Anln status 3 4 85B PT100 1 2 3 87H AnOut status 1 2 85C FI Status 871 10 Status B1 85D Digln status 87J IO Status B2 85E DigOut status 87K IO Status B3 85F Anini2 87L Run Time 85G Anin3 4 87M _ Mains Time 85H AnlOut 12 87N Energy 85 IO Status B1 880 85J IO Status B2 881 Process Value 85K IO Status B3 882 Speed 85L Run Time 818 Torque 85M Mains Time 884 Shaft Power 85N Energy 885 Electrical Power 860 886 Current 861 Process Value 887 Output voltage 862 Speed 888 Frequency 863 Torque 889 DC Link voltage 864 Shaft Power 88A Heatsink Tmp 176 Menu List DEFAULT CUSTOM 88B PT100_1 2 3 88C FI Status 88D Digln status 88E DigOut status 88F Anin status 1 2 88G Anln status 3 4 88H AnOut status 1 2 88 IO Status B1 88J IO Status B2 88K 10 Status B3 88L Run Time 88M Mains Time 88N Energy 890 891 Process Value 892 Speed 893 Torque 894 Shaft Power 895 Electrical Power 896 Current 897 Output voltage 898 Frequency 899 DC Link voltage 89A Heatsink Tmp 89B PT100_1 2 3 89C FI Status 89D Digln status 89E DigOut status 89F Anln status 12 89G Anln status 3 4 89H AnOut status 1 2 89l IO Status B1 89J IO Status B2 89K 10 Status B3 89
61. PID D Time StpfN 0 00s Default 0 00 s Range 0 00 30 s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43158 Profibus slot index 169 62 Fieldbus format Long 1 0 01 s Modbus format Elnt PID sleep functionality This function is controlled via a wait delay and a sepa rate wake up margin condition With this function it is possible to put the VSD in sleep mode when the proc ess value is at it s set point and the motor is running at minimum speed for the length of the time set in 386 By going into sleep mode the by the application con sumed energy is reduced to a minimum When the process feedback value goes below the set margin on the process reference as set in 387 the VSD will wake up automatically and normal PID operation continues see examples PID sleep when less than minimum speed 386 If the PID output is equal to or less than minimum speed for given delay time the VSD will go to sleep 386 PID MinSpd StpEA Off Default Off Range Off 0 01 3600 s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43371 Profibus slot index 170 20 Fieldbus format Long 120 01 s Modbus format Elnt NOTE Menu 386 has higher priority than menu 342 PID Activation Margin 387 The PID activation wake up margin is related to the process reference and sets the limit when the VSD should wake up start again
62. Pump Feedback Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43162 Profibus slot index 169 66 Fieldbus format UInt 94 Functional Description Modbus format Ulnt Select Drive 393 Sets the main operation of the pump system Sequence and Runtime are Fixed MASTER operation All means Alternating MASTER operation 393 Select Drive Sequence StpFA Default Sequence Sequence O Fixed MASTER operation The additional drives will be selected in sequence i e first pump 1 then pump 2 etc A maximum of 7 drives can be used Run Time 1 Fixed MASTER operation The additional drives will be selected depending on the Run Time So the drive with the lowest Run Time will be selected first The Run Time is monitored in menus 39H to 39M in sequence For each drive the Run Time can be reset When drives are stopped the drive with the longest Run Time will be stopped first Maximum 7 drives can be used All 2 Alternating MASTER operation When the drive is powered up one drive is selected as the Master drive The selection criteria depends on the Change Condition 394 The drive will be selected according to the Run Time So the drive with the low est Run Time will be selected first The Run Time is monitored in menus 39H to 39M in sequence For each drive the Run Time can be reset A maximum
63. Rated current A JNVX69 0090 108 75 90 60 72 JNVX69 0109 131 100 109 75 87 JNVX69 0146 175 125 146 100 117 i JNVX69 0175 210 150 175 125 140 JNVX69 0210 252 200 210 150 168 JNVX69 0250 300 250 250 200 200 JNVX69 0300 360 300 300 250 240 um JNVX69 0375 450 350 375 300 300 JNVX69 0430 516 400 430 350 344 JNVX69 0500 600 500 500 400 400 idi JNVX69 0600 720 600 600 500 480 JNVX69 0650 780 650 650 550 520 d JNVX69 0750 900 750 750 600 600 JNVX69 0860 1032 850 860 700 688 K69 JNVX69 1000 1200 1000 1000 850 800 Available during limited time and as long as allowed by drive temperature Table 2 Typical motor power at mains voltage 690 V Normal duty Heavy duty Model descr 120 1 min every 10 min 150 1 min every 10 min ee Power 690V kW Rated current A Power 690V kW Rated current A JNVX69 0090 108 90 90 75 72 JNVX69 0109 131 110 109 90 87 JNVX69 0146 175 132 146 110 117 um JNVX69 0175 210 160 175 132 140 JNVX69 0210 252 200 210 160 168 JNVX69 0250 300 250 250 200 200 JNVX69 0300 360 315 300 250 240 is JNVX69 0375 450 355 375 315 300 JNVX69 0430 516 450 430 315 344 JNVX69 0500 600 500 500 355 400 ae JNVX69 0600 720 600 600 450 480 JNVX69 0650 780 630 650 500 520 ee JNVX69 0750 900 710 750 600 600 JNVX69 0860 1032 800 860 650 688 JNVX69 0900 1080 900 900 710 720 i JNVX69 1000 1200 1000 1000 800 800 Available during limited time and as long as allowed by drive temperature 160 Technical Data
64. Relay 0 25 1 5 mm Not screened Example The relay output from a variable speed drive which con trols an auxiliary relay can at the moment of switching form a source of interference emission for a measure ment signal from for example a pressure sensor Therefore it is advised to separate wiring and screening to reduce disturbances 4 5 3 Screening For all signal cables the best results are obtained if the screening is connected to both ends the VSD side and the at the source e g PLC or computer See Fig 33 It is strongly recommended that the signal cables be allowed to cross mains and motor cables at a 90 angle Do not let the signal cable go in parallel with the mains and motor cable 4 5 4 Single ended or double ended connection In principle the same measures applied to motor cables must be applied to all control signal cables in accordance with the EMC Directives For all signal cables as mentioned in section 4 5 2 the best results are obtained if the screening is connected to both ends See Fig 33 NOTE Each installation must be examined carefully before applying the proper EMC measurements Control board Pressure sensor External control e g in metal housing Control consol e 6 Q Fig 33 Electro Magnetic EM screening of control signal cables Control Connections 25 4 5 5 Current signals 0 4 20 mA
65. StpFA Off Default Off Selection On Off Fieldbus Signals 266 Defines modbus mapping for additional process values For further information see the Fieldbus option man ual FB Signal 1 16 2661 266G Used to create a block of parameters which are read written via communication 1 to 8 read 1 to 8 write parameters possible 2661 FB Signal 1 StpEX 0 Default O0 Range 0 65535 Communication information 42801 42816 167 215 167 230 Fieldbus format UInt Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no Profibus slot index Modbus format UInt FB Status 269 Sub menus showing status of fieldbus parameters Please see the Fieldbus manual for detailed informa tion 269 FB Status stp 11 3 Process and Application Parameters 300 These parameters are mainly adjusted to obtain opti mum process or machine performance The read out references and actual values depends on selected process source 321 Table 23 Selected process Unit for reference and Resolution source actual value Speed rpm 4 digits Torque 96 3 digits PT100 C 3 digits Frequency Hz 3 digits 11 3 1 Set View Reference Value 310 View reference value As default the menu 310 is in view operation The value of the active reference signal is displayed The value is displayed according to selected process source 321 or the process unit selected
66. VSD needs a ref erence signal This reference signal can be controlled by a remote source from the installation the keyboard of the VSD or by serial or fieldbus communication Select the required reference control for the application in this menu Option 3 The start stop is set via an option Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43015 Profibus slot index 168 174 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt 214 Ref Control Remote StpfN Default Remote The reference signal comes from the ana Remote O logue inputs of the terminal strip terminals 1 22 Reset Contmrol 216 When the VSD is stopped due to a failure a reset com mand is required to make it possible to restart the VSD Use this function to select the source of the reset sig nal Reference is set with the and keys on Keyboard 1 the Control Panel Can only be done in menu Set View reference 310 216 Reset Ctrl The reference is set via the serial commu Com 2 nication RS 485 Fieldbus See section section 10 5 for further information The reference is set via an option Only Option 3 available if the option can control the refer ence value NOTE If the reference is switched from Remote to Keyboard the last remote reference value will be the default value for the control panel StpfN Remote Default Remote R
67. activated inhibit 30 Vac 2 A 4 relay K2 5 GND Supply ground Supply Voltage for oper 24 Vpc T S 24 NDE ating Inhibit input only 50 mA 154 Options Safe Stop Power board k1 e i zo ae e EN EE s f HT iv e v i 6 24 Vpc E E e d i 4 i I 4 rn w i oo CE UEM UN Controller PWM Stop MZ 20 DigOut Fig 113 13 9 Crane option board 13 11 PTC PT100 Order number Description Order number Description This option is used in crane applications The crane option board 2 0 is described in a separate manual 13 10 Encoder Order number Description 01 3876 03 Encoder 2 0 option board The Encoder 2 0 option board used for connection of feedback signal of the actual motor speed via an incre mental encoder is described in a separate manual 01 3876 07 CRIO Crane option board 01 3876 08 PTC PT100 2 0 option board 590059 Crane interface board 230 Vac 590060 Crane interface board 240 Vac The PTC PT100 2 0 option board for connecting motor thermistors to the VSD is described in a separate man ual Options 155 156 Options 14 Technical Data 14 1 Electrical specifications related
68. alarm will be Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43089 Profibus slot index 168 248 Fieldbus format Long 1 1s Modbus format Elnt reset if the function is active 25G Ext Trip StpEN Off Default Off Off 0 off 1 3600 1 3600 1 3600 s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43080 Profibus slot index 168 239 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 s Modbus format Elnt External Trip Type 25H Select the preferred way to react to an alarm trip Communication Error Trip Type 25J Select the preferred way to react to a communication trip 25J Com Error TT StpfN Trip Default Trip Selection Same as menu 25B Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43090 Profibus slot index 168 249 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Min Alarm 25K Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone 25H Ext Trip TT When the time delay has elapsed the alarm will be StpEN Trip reset if the function is active Default Trip 25K Min Alarm Selection Same as menu 25B StpFAX Off Communication information Default Off Off 0 Off Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43081 1 3600 1 3600 1 3600 s Profibus slot index 168 240 Fieldbus format UlInt Modbus format UlInt 70 Functional Description Communication information C
69. all changes made in 242 Co Set the software are set to factory settings This function PY also includes selections for loading default settings to Stp A gt B the four different Motor Data Sets Default A gt B A gt B O Copy set A to set B 243 Default gt Set A gt C 1 Copy set A to set C StpFA A A gt D 2 Copy set A to set D Default A B gt A 3 Copy set B to set A A 0 B gt C 4 Copy set B to set C B 1 Only the selected parameter set will revert B gt D 5 Copy set B to set D C 2 to its default settings C gt A 6 Copy set C to set A D 3 C gt B 7 Copy set C to set B All four parameter sets will revert to the ABED default settings C gt D 8 Copy set C to set D 85 All settings except 211 221 22D gt D A DRA P Copy Ser Dito set Factory 5 261 3A1 and 923 will revert to the D gt B 10 Copy set D to set B default settings D gt C 11 Copy set D to set C M1 6 T f M2 7 Only the selected motor set will revert to its Communication information M3 8 default settings Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43021 MA 9 Profibus slot index 168 180 M1234 10 All four motor sets will revert to default set4 tnings Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Communication information NOTE The actual value of menu 310 will not be copied Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43023 into the other set Profibus slot
70. are programmed for Keyboard control or Com Autoreset is not possible Run Inputs Level controlled The inputs are set as default for level control This means that an input is activated by making the input continuously High This method is commonly used if for example PLCs are used to operate the VSD comply with the Machine Directive if the inputs CAUTION Level controlled inputs DO NOT are directly used to start and stop the machine The examples given in this and the following para graphs follow the input selection shown in Fig 40 a X 2 14 3 15 4 16 5 Stop r 17 6 18 7 RunL 8 19 RunR 9 a Enable 10 Reset 22 24 V 11 Fig 40 Example of wiring for Run Stop Enable Reset inputs The Enable input must be continuously active in order to accept any run right or run left command If both RunR and RunL inputs are active then the VSD stops according to the selected Stop Mode Fig 41 gives an example of a possible sequence INPUTS ENABLE STOP RUNR RUN L OUTPUT STATUS Right rotation Left rotation Standstill 06 F103new 1 Fig 41 Input and output status for level control Run Inputs Edge controlled Menu 214A Start signal Level Edge must be set to Edge to activate edge control This means that an input is activated by a low to high transition or vice versa NOTE Edge controlled inputs comply with the Ma
71. drives have an unpainted back side and are therefore suitable for mounting on an unpainted mounting plate Connect the mains cables according to fig 20 or 21 The VSD has as standard a built in RFI mains filter that complies with category C3 which suits the Second Envi ronment standard SSS SSS SSS QI OP o 7 Z Ami 7 C 22 a DC Za oc Toc IT 8 PE Screen connection of motor cables L Fig 20 Mains and motor connections 0003 0018 T a c ANN on NONY UOCE EYSS L3 DCDCrR Uy Ww 6 e 9 S oC lt gt PE 8 Screen connection of motor cables Fig 21 Mains and motor connections 0026 0046 Table 6 Mains and motor connection L1 L2 L3 Mains supply 3 phase PE Safety earth protected earth d Motor earth U V W Motor output 3 phase DC DC R Brake resistor DC link connections optional Installation 15 NOTE The Brake and DC link Terminals are only fitted if the Brake Chopper Option is built in WARNING The Brake Resistor must be J connected between terminals DC and R WARNING In order to work safely the mains J earth must be connected to PE and the motor earth to 3 2 2 Motor cables To comply with the EMC emission standards the varia ble speed drive is provided with a RFI mains filter The motor cables must also be screened and connect
72. e g Run Stop conditions and the actual speed will remain exactly the same When the VSD is set to Local operation the display will show in area B in the dis play The VSD will be started and stopped using the keys on the control panel The reference signal can be control led using the and keys on the keyboard when in the menu 310 according to the selection in Keyboard Ref erence menu 369 Remote mode When the VSD is switched to REMOTE operation the VSD will be controlled according to selected control methods in the menu s Reference Control 214 Run Stop Control 215 and Reset Control 216 The actual operation status of the VSD will reflect the status and settings of the programmed control selections e g Start Stop status and settings of the programmed con trol selections acceleration or deceleration speed according to the selected reference value in the menu Acceleration Time 331 Deceleration Time 332 To monitor the actual Local or Remote status of the VSD control a Loc Rem function is available on the Digital Outputs or Relays When the VSD is set to Local the signal on the DigOut or Relay will be active high in Remote the signal will be inactive low See menu Digital Outputs 540 and Relays 550 9 2 6 Function keys The function keys operate the menus and are also used for programming and read outs of all the menu set tings Table 21 Function keys Step to a lower menu l ENTER
73. gain must be manually tuned for a faster reaction to load changes The speed P gain can be increased until there is audible noise from the motor and then decreased until the noise disappears 90 Functional Description 372 Spd P Gain StpFAX Default Off Off 0 PID control deactivated Default See note Range 0 0 60 0 The speed increases when the feedback On 1 value decreases PID settings according to menus 382 to 385 Communication information The speed decreases when the feedback Invert 2 value decreases PID settings according to menus 382 to 385 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43152 Profibus slot index 169 56 Fieldbus format Long 1 0 1 Modbus format EInt Speed Time 373 To adjust the time of the internal speed controller see parameter Speed PI Autotune 371 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43154 Profibus slot index 169 58 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt 373 Spd I Time StpEN PID P Gain 383 Setting the P gain for the PID controller Default See note Range 0 05 100 s Communication information 383 PID P Gain StpfN 1 0 Default 1 0 Range 0 0 30 0 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43153 Profibus slot index 169 57 Fieldbus format Long 1 0 01 s Modbus format Elnt NOTE The def
74. has been reached the trip message hour counter is marked with an A If the Autoreset is full then the VSD must be reset by a normal Reset Example e Autoreset 5 Within 10 minutes 6 trips occur Atthe 6th trip there is no Autoreset because the Autoreset trip log contains 5 trips already Toreset apply a normal reset set the reset input high to low and high again to maintain the Autoreset function The counter is reset 251 No of Trips StpfN 0 Default O no Autoreset Range 0 10 attempts Communication information Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43072 Profibus slot index 168 231 Fieldbus format Long 1721s Modbus format EInt NOTE An auto reset is delayed by the remaining ramp time Overvolt D 253 Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone When the time delay has elapsed the alarm will be reset if the function is active 253 Overvolt D StpEN Off Default Off Off 0 Off 1 3600 1 3600 1 3600 s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43075 Profibus slot index 168 234 Fieldbus format Long 1 1s Modbus format Elnt NOTE An auto reset is delayed by the remaining ramp time Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43071 Profibus slot index 168 230 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Overvolt G 254 Delay tim
75. high Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no AnIn1 43210 Profibus slot index Anin1 169 114 Fieldbus format UInt Modbus format Ulnt Anln2 Function 514 Parameter for setting the function of Analogue Input 2 Same function as Anln1 Func 511 514 AnIn2 Fc StpEN Off Default Off Selection Same as in menu 511 Functional Description 113 Communication information Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43211 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43221 Profibus slot index 169 115 Profibus slot index 169 125 Fieldbus format UInt Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt AnIn2 Setup 515 Parameter for setting the function of Analogue Input 2 Same functions as Anln1 Setup 512 StpEA 515 AnIn2 Setup 4 20mA Default 4 20mA Dependent on Setting of switch S2 Selection Same as in menu 512 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43212 Profibus slot index 169 116 Fieldbus format UInt Modbus format Ulnt AnIn2 Advanced 516 Same functions and submenus as under AnIn1i Advanced 513 516 AnIn2 Advan StpFA Communication information 43213 43220 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43542 43552 169 117 124 Profibus slot index 170 191
76. index 170 12 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt 108 Functional Description 11 5 I Os and Virtual Connections 500 Main menu with all the settings of the standard inputs and outputs of the VSD 11 5 1 Analogue Inputs 510 Submenu with all settings for the analogue inputs Anln1 Function 511 Sets the function for Analogue input 1 Scale and range are defined by AnIn1 Advanced settings 513 511 AnInl1 Fc StpEN Process Ref Default Process Ref Off 0 Input is not active Max Speed 1 The input acts as an upper speed limit Max Torque 2 The input acts as an upper torque limit The input value equals the actual process value feedback and is compared to the reference signal set point by the PID con troller or can be used to display and view the actual process value Process Val 3 Reference value is set for control in proc ess units see Process Source 321 and Process Unit 322 Process Ref 4 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43201 Profibus slot index 169 105 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt NOTE When AnInX Func Off the connected signal will still be available for Comparators 610 Adding analogue inputs If more then one analogue input is set to the same function the values of the inputs can be added together In the following examples we assume that Process Source 321 i
77. key eval ENTER confirm a changed setting step to a higher 2E menu level ESCAPE key ignore a changed EC setting without confirming Step to a previous menu within the same PREVIOUS key level PREV goto more significant digit in edit mode step to a next menu NEXT key within the same level NEXT go to less significant digit in edit mode decrease a value key y change a selection increase a value d key change a selection Fig 52 Menu structure Operation via the Control Panel 43 9 3 The menu structure The menu structure consists of 4 levels M The first character in the menu number 2nd level The second character in the menu number 3rd level The third character in the menu number Ath level The fourth character in the menu number This structure is consequently independent of the number of menus per level For instance a menu can have one selectable menu Set View Reference Value 310 or it can have 17 selectable menus menu Speeds 340 NOTE If there are more than 10 menus within one level the numbering continues in alphabetic order PREV NEXT 4 2 700 MAIN MENU 300 ENTER ll ESC SUBMENU 1 tens PREV NEXT cm EN a m 69 PREV NEXT NG 06 F28 Fig 53 Menu structure 9 3 1 The main menu This section gives you a short description of the func tions i
78. large as possible For this purpose the removal of paint is necessary An alternative method is to connect the variable speed drive housing to the mounting plate with as short a length of litz wire as possible Try to avoid interruptions in the screening wherever possible e If the variable speed drive is mounted in a standard 16 Installation cabinet the internal wiring must comply with the EMC standard Fig 23 shows an example of a VSD built into a cabinet VSD built into cabinet VSD RFI Filter option Mains L3 Metal EMC cable glands Output coil option Screened cables Unpainted mounting plate Metal connector housing m M Mains Metal coupling Motor LLL2L3 PE nut _ Brake resistor 77 option 06 F39 Fig 23 Variable speed drive in a cabinet on a mounting plate Fig 24 shows an example when there is no metal mounting plate used e g if IP54 variable speed drives are used It is important to keep the circuit closed by using metal housing and cable glands Mains l1 12 13 PE pci u v Iw SSZ d Wr m Metal EMC cable me glands qu Screened
79. level Functional Description 127 Communication information Communication information 1H 1 1 rpm or 0 001 via process value Modbus format EInt Digital Comparator 1 617 Selection of the input signal for digital comparator 1 CD1 The output signal CD1 becomes high if the selected input signal is active See Fig 97 The output signal can be programmed to the digital or relay outputs or used as a source for the virtual connec tions 560 Digital signal Signal CD1 Menu 617 NG 06 F126 Fig 97 Digital comparator 617 CD1 StpFA Run Default Run Selection Same selections as for DigOut 1 541 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43407 Profibus slot index 170 56 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Digital Comparator 2 618 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43406 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43408 Profibus slot index 170 55 Profibus slot index 170 57 Long Fieldbus format Ulnt 1 1 W 0 1 A 0 1 V Fieldbus format 0 1 Hz 0 1 C 1 kWh Modbus format uing 11 6 2 Logic Output Y 620 By means of an expression editor the comparator sig nals can be logically combined into the Logic Y function The expression editor has the following features e The following signals can be used CA1 CA2 CD1 CD2 or LZ or LY The
80. must be connected to PE and the motor earth to 5 2 Using the function keys Fig 35 Example of menu navigation when entering motor voltage e step to lower menu level or confirm changed setting ENTER h step to higher menu level or ignore changed setting ESC gt step to next menu on the same level c step to previous menu on the same level increase value or change selection decrease value or change selection Getting Started 27 5 3 Remote control In this example external signals are used to control the VSD motor A standard 4 pole motor for 400 V an external start button and a reference value will also be used 5 3 1 Connect control cables Here you will make up the minimum wiring for starting In this example the motor VSD will run with right rota tion To comply with the EMC standard use screened control cables with plaited flexible wire up to 1 5 mm or solid wire up to 2 5 mm 3 Connect a reference value between terminals 7 Common and 2 Anin 1 as in Fig 36 4 Connect an external start button between terminal 11 24 VDC and 9 DigIn2 RUNR as in Fig 36 db Reference 4 20 mA ov CoN o e om fX Start o S m 42 43 Fig 36 Wiring 5 3 2 Switch on the mains Close the door to the VSD Once the mains is switched on the internal fan in the VSD will run for 5 seconds 5 3 3
81. of an emer gency 1 3 Type code number Fig 1 gives an example of the type code numbering used on all variable speed drives With this code number the exact type of the drive can be determined This identification will be required for type specific infor mation when mounting and installing The code number is located on the product label on the front of the unit JNVX48 0175 54CE A NNNNAN Position number 1 2 3 4 567 8 9101112 13 14 15 16 17 18 Fig l Type code number Position Position for for 0003 0060 Configuration 0046 1500 F33 1 1 VSD type V33 40 48 400 V mains 2 2 Supply voltage 50 52 525 V mains 69 690 V mains Introduction 5 the declarations of conformity and manufacturer s cer tificate contact your supplier for more information 1 4 1 Product standard for EMC Product standard EN IEC 61800 3 second edition of 2004 defines the First Environment Extended EMC as environment that includes domestic premises It also includes establish ments directly connected without intermediate trans formers to a low voltage power supply network that supplies buildings used for domestic purposes Category C2 Power Drive System PDS of rated volt age 1 000 V which is neither a plug in device nor a movable device and when used in the first environ ment is intended to be installed and commissioned only by a professional
82. output can be completely defined according to the application needs The menus will automatically be adapted to mA or V according to the selection in AnOut1 Setup 532 533 AnOut 1 Adv StpFA AnOut1 Min 5331 This parameter is automatically displayed if User mA or User V is selected in menu AnOut 1 Setup 532 The menu will automatically adapt to current or voltage set ting according to the selected setup Only visible if 532 User mA V 5331 AnOut 1 Min StpEA 4mA Default 4 mA Range 0 00 20 00 mA O 10 00 V Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43253 AnOut1 Bipol 5333 Automatically displayed if User Bipol mA or User Bipol V is selected in menu AnOut1 Setup The menu will auto matically show mA or V range according to the selected function The range is set by changing the positive max imum value the negative value is automatically adapted accordingly Only visible if 512 User Bipol mA V 5333 AnOutlBipol Stp 10 00 10 00V Default 10 00 10 00 V Range 10 00 10 00 V 20 0 20 0 mA Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43255 Profibus slot index 169 159 Fieldbus format Long 1 0 01 Modbus format EInt AnOut41 Function Min 5334 With AnOut1 Function Min the physical minimum value is scaled to selected presentation The default scaling is dependent of the selected f
83. parallel must have the Motor Voltage same motor voltage Menu 222 The motors in parallel must have the Motor Frequency same motor frequency Menu 223 Add the motor power values for the Motor Power motors in parallel Menu 224 Motor Current Add the current for the motors in parallel Menu 225 Set the average speed for the motors in Motor Speed parallel Menu 227 Set the average Cos PHI value for the Motor Cos PHI motors in parallel NOTE The shafts of the motors in parallel must be physically connected to obtain correct torque and speed control 20 Installation 4 Control Connections 4 1 Control board Fig 28 shows the layout of the control board which is where the parts most important to the user are located Although the control board is galvanically isolated from the mains for safety reasons do not make changes while the mains supply is on WARNING Always switch off the mains voltage and wait at least 5 minutes to allow the DC capacitors to discharge before connecting the control signals or changing position of any switches If the option External supply is used switch of the mains to the option This is done to prevent damage on the control board C Communication Switches Sly 1S82y 1S3y 1S4y Control signals 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Ll AO1 AO2 ODI4 DI5 DIE DI7 DO1 DO2 DI8 X111 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 10V Ald AI2 AIS3 Al
84. sec Range 0 00 00 9 59 59 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 42924 hours 42925 minutes 42926 seconds 711 Process Val Stp Unit Depends on selected process source 321 Speed 1 rpm 4 digits Resolution Other units 3 digits Communication information Profibus slot index 168 83 168 84 168 84 Fieldbus format Modbus format Ulnt Ulnt Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 31001 Profibus slot index 121 145 Fieldbus format Long 1 0 001 Modbus format Elnt Speed 712 Displays the actual shaft speed 712 Speed Stp rpm Unit rom Resolution 1 rpm 4 digits Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 31002 Profibus slot index 121 146 Fieldbus format Int 1 1 rpm Modbus format Int 121 rpm 134 Functional Description Torque 713 Displays the actual shaft torque Current 716 Displays the actual output current 713 Torque 716 Current Stp 0 0 0Nm Stp A Unit Nm Unit A Resolution 1 Nm Resolution O 1A Communication information Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no Spt a Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 31007 o Profibus slot index 121 151 Profib lot ind 121 147 rofibusslotindex Fieldbus format Long 1 0 1A i 19 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 Madbus format El
85. the VSD will automat ically wake up and ramp up to the required speed NOTE Menu 386 has higher priority than menu 342 342 Stp MinSpd StpFAX Off Default Off Off 0 off 1 3600 1 3600 1 3600 s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43122 Profibus slot index 169 26 Fieldbus format Long 1 0 01 s Modbus format Elnt PID ref PID out 842 NG_50 PC 9_1 Functional Description 85 Maximum Speed 343 Communication information Sets the maximum speed at 10 V 20 mA unless a user defined characteristic of the analogue input is Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43124 programmed The synchronous speed Sync spd is Profibus slot index 169 28 determined by the parameter motor speed 225 The Fieldbus format Int EE speed will operate as an absolute maximum Modbus format Int imit This parameter is used to prevent damage due to high speed 343 Max Speed VA StpfN 1500 rpm Default 1500 rpm Skip Speed HI Range Min Speed 4 x Motor Synce Seeed E Dependent on Motor Speed 225 vip Speed LO Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43123 Profibus slot index 169 27 aR gt Fieldbus format Int 121 rpm NG 06 F17 Modbus format Int 121 rpm Fig 69 Skip Speed NOTE It is not possible
86. the cabinets regu larly Check external wiring connections and control signals Tighten terminal screws if necessary Troubleshooting Diagnoses and Maintenance 149 150 Troubleshooting Diagnoses and Maintenance 13 Options The standard options available are described here briefly Some of the options have their own instruction or installation manual For more information please contact your supplier 13 1 Options for the control panel Order number Description 01 3957 00 Panel kit complete including panel 13 3 Brake chopper All VSD sizes can be fitted with an optional built in brake chopper The brake resistor must be mounted outside the VSD The choice of the resistor depends on the application switch on duration and duty cycle This option can not be after mounted resistors lower than this value The VSD can trip or even be damaged due to high braking currents WARNING The table gives the minimum J values of the brake resistors Do not use 01 3957 01 Panel kit complete including blank panel Mounting cassette blank panel and straight RS232 cable are available as options for the control panel These options may be useful for example after mount ing a control panel in a cabinet door Sell The following formula can be used to define the power of the connected brake resis
87. the motor noise at low or no load conditions Flux Optimization automatically decreases the V Hz ratio depending on the actual load of the motor when the process is in a steady situation Fig 72 shows the area within which the Flux Optimization is active 354 Flux optim StpFA Off Default Off Off 0 Function disabled On 1 Function enabled Communication information Fig 71 IxR Comp at Linear V Hz curve Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43144 Profibus slot index 169 48 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt 88 Functional Description Fig 72 Flux Optimizing NOTE Flux optimization works best at stable situations in slow changing processes 11 3 7 Preset References 360 Motor Potentiometer 361 Sets the properties of the motor potentiometer func tion See the parameter Digln1 521 for the selection of the motor potentiometer function Motpot j j j UP Motpot 361 Motor Pot StpE Non Volatie Default Non Volatile After a stop trip or power down the VSD Volatile 0 will start always from zero speed or mini mum speed if selected Non Volatile After a stop trip or power down of the VSD the reference value at the moment of the stop will be memo rized After a new start command the out put speed will resume to this saved value Non volatile 1 Communication infor
88. the option can control the Profibus slot index 168 226 selection Fieldbus format UlInt Communication information Modbus format UInt 11 2 6 Parameter Set Handling 240 There are four different parameter sets available in the VSD These parameter sets can be used to set the VSD up for different processes or applications such as dif ferent motors used and connected activated PID con troller different ramp time settings etc A parameter set consists of all parameters with the exception of the menu 211 Language 217 Local Remote 218 Lock Code 220 Motor Data 241 Select Set and 260 Serial Communication Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43022 Profibus slot index 168 181 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt The active set can be viewed with function 721 FI sta tus NOTE Parameter set cannot be changed during run if this also would imply a change of the motor set M2 M4 NOTE Actual timers are common for all sets When a set is changed the timer functionality will change according to the new set but the timer value will stay unchanged 64 Functional Description Copy Set 242 This function copies the content of a parameter set into another parameter set Load Default Values Into Set 243 With this function three different levels factory set tings can be selected for the four parameter sets When loading the default settings
89. to model Table 38 Typical motor power at mains voltage 400 V Normal duty Heavy duty D 3 otd ie oupa 120 1 min every 10 min 150 1 min every 10 min TOR Power 400V Rated current Power 400V Rated current kW A kW A JNVX48 0003 3 8 0 75 2 5 0 55 2 0 JNVX48 0004 6 0 1 5 4 0 1 1 3 2 JNVX48 0006 9 0 2 2 6 0 1 5 4 8 JNVX48 0008 11 3 3 7 5 2 2 6 0 B JNVX48 0010 14 3 4 9 5 3 7 6 JNVX48 0013 19 5 55 13 0 4 10 4 JNVX48 0018 27 0 7 5 18 0 5 5 14 4 JNVX48 0026 39 11 26 7 5 21 JNVX48 0031 46 15 31 11 25 JNVX48 0037 55 18 5 37 15 29 6 j JNVX48 0046 69 22 46 18 5 37 JNVX40 0060 92 30 61 JNVX40 0073 111 37 74 a JNVX48 0090 108 45 90 37 72 JNVX48 0109 134 55 109 45 87 JNVX48 0146 175 75 146 55 117 JNVX48 0175 210 90 175 75 140 JNVX48 0210 252 110 210 90 168 JNVX48 0250 300 132 250 110 200 i JNVX48 0300 360 160 300 132 240 JNVX48 0375 450 200 375 160 300 2 JNVX48 0430 516 220 430 200 344 JNVX48 0500 600 250 500 220 400 T JNVX48 0600 720 315 600 250 480 JNVX48 0650 780 355 650 315 520 l JNVX48 0750 900 400 750 355 600 JNVX48 0860 1032 450 860 400 688 JNVX48 1000 1200 500 1000 450 800 JNVX48 1200 1440 630 1200 500 960 JNVX48 1500 1800 800 1500 630 1200 i Available during limited time and as long as allowed by drive temperature Technical Data 157
90. to set the maximum speed lower NOTE The two Skip Speed ranges may be overlapped than the minimum speed Skip Speed 1 High 345 NOTE Maximum speed 343 must be set to the Skipspd1 HI sets the higher value for the 1st skip synchronus speed of the motor no load speed to reach range a speed corresponding to the rated frequency of the motor Example 4 pole 50 Hz motor 1500 rpm 345 SkipSpd 1 Hi StpFA Orpm Skip Speed 1 Low 344 Within the Skip Speed range High to Low the speed cannot be constant in order to avoid mechanical reso Range O 4 x Sync Speed Default O rpm nance in the VSD system When Skip Speed Low lt Ref Speed Skip Speed High Onin Moun IUTONOMON then Output Speed Skip Speed HI during deceleration and Output Speed Skip Speed LO during acceleration Modbus Instance ng DeviceNetno 43125 Fig 69 shows the function of skip speed hi and low Profibus slot index 169 29 Between Skip Speed HI and LO the speed changes Fieldbus format Int with the set acceleration and deceleration times Modbus format Int Skipspd1 LO sets the lower value for the 1st skip range I Skip Speed 2 Low 346 SS Eo i s The same function as menu 344 for the 2nd skip StPEN Orpm range Default O rpm Range 0 4 x Motor Sync Speed 346 SkipSpd 2 Lo StpiN Orpm Default O rpm Range O 4x Motor Sync Speed 86 Functional Descri
91. 0 provides three extra relay out puts and three extra digital inputs The I O Board works in combination with the Pump Fan Control but can also be used as a separate option This option is described in a separate manual 13 5 Output coils Output coils which are supplied separately are recom mended for lengths of screened motor cable longer than 100 m Because of the fast switching of the motor voltage and the capacitance of the motor cable both line to line and line to earth screen large switching cur rents can be generated with long lengths of motor cable Output coils prevent the VSD from tripping and should be installed as closely as possible to the VSD 13 6 Serial communication and fieldbus Order number Description 01 3876 04 RS232 485 01 3876 05 Profibus DP 01 3876 06 DeviceNet 01 3876 09 Modbus TCP Ethernet For communication with the VSD there are several option boards for communication There are different options for Fieldbus communication and one serial communication option with RS232 or RS485 interface which has galvanic isolation 13 7 Standby supply board option Order number Description 01 3954 00 Standby power supply kit for after mounting The standby supply board option provides the possibil ity of keeping the communication system up and run ning without having the 3 phase mains connected One advantage is that the system can be set up without mains power Th
92. 026 22 25 M32 15 21 M25 JNVX 0031 26 35 2 5 16 2 5 16 6 35 JNVX 0037 31 35 M40 19 28 M32 JNVX 0046 38 50 JNVX 0060 51 63 4 16 4 16 4 16 M40 19 28 M40 27 34 JNVX 0073 64 80 4 35 4 35 JNVX 0090 78 100 16 95 16 95 16 95 JNVX 0109 94 100 16 70 JNVX48 030 45 cable entry or M63 JNVX 0146 126 160 z 3 35 150 16 95 35 T JNVX69 027 66 cable entry JNVX 0175 152 160 16 70 JNVX 0210 182 200 JNVX48 35 240 JNVX48 35 JNVX48 35 240 95 185 150 JNVX48 27 66 cable entry JNVX 0250 216 250 JNVX69 35 150 JNVX69 16 95 JNVX69 35 150 16 70 JNVX 0300 260 300 JNVX48 2x 35 240 duce D 7 JNVX 0375 324 355 JNVX69 2x 35 150 duse seen 372 400 JNVX48 2x 35 240 TEM 7 e JNVX 0500 432 500 SEES GEASS m JNVX 0600 520 630 JNVX48 3x 35 240 P 7 7 JNVX 0650 562 630 JNVX69 4x 35 150 JNVX48 3x 35 240 JNVX 0750 648 710 JNVX69 6x 35 150 frame Technical Data 165 Table 49 Fuses cable cross sections and glands Nominal Maximum Cable cross section connector range mm for Cable glands clamping range input mm Model value fuse current A A mains motor Brake PE mains motor Brake JNVX 0860 744 800 JNVXA8 4x 35 240 Ja JNVX 0900 795 900 JNVX69 6x 35 150 frame JNVX 1000 864 1000 JNVX 1200 1037 1250 JNVX48 6x 35 240 frame JNVX 1500 1296 1500 Note For models 0003 to 0046 cable gland
93. 06 4162 iei rites 104 624 niis eiie etic 129 Delay time 103 AT uie diee 104 625 iiie stie 129 Max Alarm sss 103 TT uuum 104 630 us 130 Overload 38 103 4112 aee 105 631 ace eee 130 Response delay 104 106 418 eee 105 632 ii aiite 130 Start delay 103 4181 sane 105 633 aiiis ei ien 130 Motor cables ssssss 16 4182 niea ee 105 634 eir eec 131 Motor cos phi power factor 59 4 19 xis 105 635 ouis eeried 131 Motor data eeesssess 58 419I iiu eie 105 GAO iian 131 Motor frequency 59 4192 siis 106 641 seo alanis ails 131 Motor I2t Current 147 TA uis Aelia 106 642 5 renes 132 Motor identification run 60 41B sese 106 643 Lisci 132 Motor Potentiometer 89 116 416 sene 106 6445 iini 132 Motor potentiometer 116 421 inei 107 645 dee nus 132 Motor ventilation 59 422 eie eet 108 649 eS aee 133 MOtOI S 5 ina eed 5 423 ici 108 650 seines 133 Motors in parallel 20 424 xis 108 651 nio miei 133 MOtPOt iue enini 81 DTT uincere 109 O52 iiie stie tus 133 KEH EA esce serene ener nnd 110 653 de 133 N 513 111 654
94. 17 20 Table 35 Brake resistors J NVX69 V types JNVX40 9 7 NA Rmin ohm Rmin ohm Rmin ohm 0060 Type if supply if supply if supply E m n 500 525 V4c 550 600 Vac 660 690 Vac dou 38 4 4 y ponas 4 9 5 7 6 5 0109 38 AA 0109 4 9 5 7 6 5 0146 38 aA 0146 4 9 5 7 6 5 0175 38 AA 0175 4 9 5 7 6 5 0210 27 34 0210 2x49 2x5 2x6 5 0250 27 34 0250 2x49 2x5 7 2x65 0300 2x38 2x44 0300 2x49 2x5 7 2x65 0375 2x38 2x44 0375 2x49 2x5 7 2x65 0430 2x27 2x34 0430 3x4 9 3x5 7 3x6 5 0500 2x27 2x31 0500 3x4 9 3x5 7 3x6 5 0600 3x2 7 3x3 1 0600 4x4 9 4x5 7 4x6 5 0650 3x27 3x34 0650 4x4 9 4x5 7 4 x 6 5 0750 3x27 3x34 0750 6x49 6x 5 7 6x 6 5 0860 4x27 4x31 0860 6x4 9 6x5 7 6x 6 5 1000 4x27 4x31 0900 6x4 9 6x5 7 6x6 5 1200 6x27 6x34 1000 6x49 6x5 7 6x6 5 1500 6x2 7 6x34 Table 34 Brake resistors NVX50 52 V types NOTE Although the VSD will detect a failure in the brake electronics the use of resistors with a thermal overload which will cut off the power at overload is strongly Tvpe Rmin ohm if supply Rmin ohm if supply recommended di 440 480 Vac 500 525 Vac The brake chopper option is built in by the manufac JNVX52 En 0003 50 55 turer and must be specified when the VSD is ordered 0004 50 55 0006 50 55 0008 50 55 152 Options 13 4 1 0 Board Order number Description 01 3876 01 1 0 option board 2 0 The I O option board 2
95. 170 201 AnIn3 Function 517 Parameter for setting the function of Analogue Input 3 Same function as Anln1 Func 511 StpfN 517 AnIn3 Fc Off Default Off Selection Same as in menu 511 Anln3 Setup 518 Same functions as AnIn1 Setup 512 518 AnIn3 Setup StpEN 4 20mA Default 4 20 mA Dependent on Setting of switch S3 Selection Same as in menu 512 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43222 Profibus slot index 169 126 Fieldbus format UInt Modbus format Ulnt AnIn3 Advanced 519 Same functions and submenus as under Anln1 Advanced 513 519 AnIn3 Advan StpfN Communication information 43223 43230 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43543 43553 169 127 169 134 170 192 170 202 Profibus slot index AnIn4 Function 51A Parameter for setting the function of Analogue Input 4 Same function as Anln1 Func 511 51A AnIn4 Fc StpEX Off Default Off Selection Same as in menu 511 114 Functional Description Communication information 11 5 2 Digital Inputs 520 Submenu with all the settings for the digital inputs Anin4 Set up 51B Same functions as Anln1 Setup 512 51B AnIn4 StpFA Setup 4 20mA Default 4 20 mA Dependent on Setting of switch S4 S
96. 2 Communication information lt 66 It limit protection active V Limit 67 Overvoltage limit function active Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43272 C Limit 68 Overcurrent limit function active Profibus slot index 169 176 Overtemp 69 Over temperature warning Fieldbus format UInt Low voltage 70 Low voltage warning Modbus format Ulnt Digln 1 71 Digital input 1 Digln 2 72 Digital input 2 Functional Description 121 11 5 5 Relays 550 Submenu with all the settings for the relay outputs The relay mode selection makes it possible to establish a fail safe relay operation by using the normal closed contact to function as the normal open contact Relay 3 553 Sets the function for the relay output 3 NOTE Additional relays will become available when I O option boards are connected Maximum 3 boards with 3 relays each 553 Relay 3 Relay 1 551 Sets the function for the relay output 1 Same function as digital output 1 541 can be selected 551 Relay 1 StpfN Off Default Off Selection Same as in menu 541 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43275 Profibus slot index 169 179 Fieldbus format UInt Modbus format UInt StpEN Trip Default Trip Selection Same as in menu 541 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43273 Profibus slot index 169 177 Fieldbus forma
97. 20 VSD Status 721 Indicates the overall status of the variable speed drive 721 VSD Status Stp 1 222 333 44 Fig 100VSD status Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 31010 Display Mm Status Value Profibus slot index 121 154 position Fieldbus format Long 1 0 1 V 1 Parameter Set A B C D Modbus format Elnt Key keyboard Source of reference Rem remote 222 value Com Serial comm Heatsink Temperature 71A Opt option Displays the actual heatsink temperature Source of Run Key keyboard Rem remote 333 Stop Reset com mand Com Serial comm 71A Heatsink Tmp Opt option ec PUB TL Torque Limit Unit eG 23 SL Speed Limit 44 Limit functions CL Current Limit Resolution 0 1 C VL Voltage Limit No limit active Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 31011 Profibus slot index 121 155 Fieldbus format Long 1 0 1 C Modbus format EInt PT10O 1 2 3 Temp 71B Displays the actual PT100 temperature 71B PT100 1 2 3 Stp ec Unit C Resolution 1 C Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 31012 31013 31014 Profibus slot index 121 156 Fieldbus format Long Modbus format EInt Example A Key Rem TL This means A Parameter Set A is active Key Reference value comes from the keyboard CP Rem Run Stop
98. 23 The value is then 123x102 1 23 Serial communication 49 Programming example typedef struct int m 11 mantissa 1024 1023 int e 4 exponent 8 7 unsigned int f 1 format 1 gt special emoint format eintl6 unsigned short int float to eintl6 float value eintl6 etmp int dec 0 while floor value value amp amp dec lt 16 dect value 10 if value gt 0 amp amp value lt 32767 amp amp dec 0 short int amp etmp short int value else if value 1000 amp amp value lt 0O amp amp dec 0 0 1 short int value etmp e etmp f etmp m else etmp m 0 etmp f 1 etmp e dec if value gt 0 etmp m 1 Set sign else etmp m 1 Set sign value fabs value while value gt 1000 etmp e t increase exponent value value 10 valuet 0 5 round etmp m etmp m value make signed return unsigned short int amp etmp float eintl 6_to_float unsigned short int value float f einti16 evalue evalue eintl6 amp value if evalue f if evalue e gt 0 f int evalue m pow10 evalue e else f int evalue m powl10 abs evalue e else f value return f 50 Serial communication Example TECO 15 bit fixed point format The value 72 0 can be represented as the fixed point number 72 It is within the range O 32767 which means that the 15 bit fixe
99. 3 s 371 Spd PI Auto StpFA Off Default Off Off 0 On 1 Communication information the key or is pressed The Acc MotPot 333 and Dec MotPot 334 are used StpEA Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43151 Default Normal Profibus slot index 169 55 The reference value is edited as a normal Fieldbus format Ulnt parameter the new reference value is Normal 0 activated when Enter is pressed after the Modbus format Ulnt value has been changed The Acc Time S31 and pee line 332 are used NOTE Run the autotune at speed lower than 80 of the The reference value is edited using the nominal motor speed Otherwise autotune will fail motor potentiometer function the new MotPot 1 reference value is activated directly when NOTE The setting will automatically return to Off when the autotuning is finished Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43139 Profibus slot index 169 43 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt NOTE When Key Ref Mode is set to MotPot the reference value ramp times are according to the Acc MotPot 333 and Dec MotPot 334 settings Actual speed ramp will be limited according to Acc Time 331 and Dec Time 332 NOTE This menu is only visible if VSD Mode Speed or V Hz Speed P Gain 372 For adjusting the P gain of the internal speed controller The speed P
100. 31038 software version 31039 option version Profibus slot index 121 182 183 Fieldbus format UInt Modbus format UInt Table 28 Information for Modbus and Profibus number software version Bit Description 7 0 minor 13 8 major release 15 14 OO V release version O1 P pre release version 10 B Beta version 11 a Alpha version Table 29 Information for Modbus and Profibus number option version Bit Description 7 0 minor 15 8 major V 4 20 Version of the Software NOTE It is important that the software version displayed in menu 920 is the same software version number as the software version number written on the title page of this instruction manual If not the functionality as described in this manual may differ from the functionality of the VSD 142 Functional Description Unit name 923 Option to enter a name of the unit for service use or customer identity The function enables the user to define a name with 12 symbols Use the Prev and Next key to move the cursor to the required position Then use the and keys to scroll in the character list Con firm the character by moving the cursor to the next posi tion by pressing the Next key See section User defined Unit 323 Example Create user name USER 15 1 When in the menu 923 press Next to move the cur sor to the right most position 2 Pre
101. 390 sess 94 11 3 11 Crane Option SAO eese 100 11 4 Load Monitor and Process Protection 400 103 11 4 1 Load Monitor 410 esses 103 11 4 2 Process Protection 420 sss 107 11 5 I Os and Virtual Connections 5O0 109 11 5 1 Analogue Inputs 510 esses 11 5 2 Digital Inputs 520 11 5 3 Analogue Outputs 530 11 5 4 Digital Outputs 540 sesssssssssss 11 5 5 Relays 550 11 5 6 Virtual Connections 560 123 11 6 Logical Functions and Timers 600 124 11 6 1 Comparators 610 esses 124 11 6 2 Logic Output Y 620 esses 128 11 6 3 Logic Output Z 630 130 11 6 4 Timer1 640 neninn 131 11 6 5 Timer2 650 cte e RH eee 133 11 7 View Operation Status 700 134 11 7 1 Operation 7 10 5 nete 11 7 2 Status 620 i eii ef rfe 11 7 3 Stored values 730 11 8 11 8 1 11 8 2 11 8 3 11 9 11 9 1 12 12 1 12 2 12 2 1 12 2 2 12 2 3 12 2 4 12 3 13 13 1 13 2 13 3 13 4 13 5 13 6 13 7 13 8 13 9 13 10 13 11 14 14 1 14 2 14 3 14 4 14 5 14 6 14 6 1 14 6 2 14 7 15 View Trip Log 800 essere 140 Trip Message log 810
102. 4 10V l1 DIT DI2 DI3 24V Control Panel RO2 41 42 43 Relay outputs NC C NO xo 31 32 33 51 52 NC C NO X3 NO C RO1 R03 Fig 28 Control board layout Control Connections 21 4 2 Terminal connections The terminal strip for connecting the control signals is accessible after opening the front panel The table describes the default functions for the sig nals The inputs and outputs are programmable for other functions as described in chapter 11 page 53 For signal specifications refer to chapter 14 page 157 NOTE The maximum total combined current for outputs 11 20 and 21 is 100mA Table 14 Control signals Terminal Name Function Default iii Mee Relay 2 output 42 COM 2 Run active when the VSD is 43 N O 2 started 51 COM 3 Relay 3 output 52 N O 3 off Table 14 Control signals NOTE N C is opened when the relay is active and N O is closed when the relay is active Terminal Name Function Default TP 4 3 Inputs configuration 1 10 V 10 VDC supply voltage with the switches 6 10 V 10 VDC supply voltage The switches S1 to S4 are used to set the input configu ration for the 4 analogue inputs AnIn1 AnIn2 AnIn3 f Common Signal ground and Anln4 as described in table 15 See Fig 28 for the 11 24 V 24 V
103. 4 V di 105et Ctrl ge 16 Set Ctr12 NGO6 FO3 1 Fig 37 Selecting the parameter sets Select and copy parameter set The parameter set selection is done in menu 241 Select Set First select the main set in menu 241 nor mally A Adjust all settings for the application Usually most parameters are common and therefore it saves a lot of work by copying set A gt B in menu 242 When parameter set A is copied to set B you only change the parameters in the set that need to be changed Repeat for C and D if used With menu 242 Copy Set it is easy to copy the com plete contents of a single parameter set to another parameter set If for example the parameter sets are selected via digital inputs Digln 3 is set to Set Ctrl 1 in menu 523 and Digln 4 is set to Set Ctrl 2 in menu 524 they are activated as in Table 17 Activate the parameter changes via digital input by set ting menu 241 Select Set to Digln Table 17 Parameter set Set Ctrl 1 Set Ctrl 2 Parameter set 0 1 0 D 1 NOTE The selection via the digital inputs is immediately activated The new parameter settings will be activated on line also during Run 0 0 1 1 NOTE The default parameter set is parameter set A Examples Different parameter sets can be used to easily change the setup of a VSD to adapt quickly to different applica tion requirements For example when a process needs optimized
104. 4 minutes 43435 seconds 170 82 170 83 Profibus slot index 170 84 Fieldbus format UlInt Modbus format UInt NOTE Timer 1 T1 644 and Timer 2 T1 654 are only visible when Timer Mode is set to Alternate 132 Functional Description Timer 1 Value 649 Timer 1 Value shows actual value of the timer Communication information Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 42921 hours 42922 minutes 42923 seconds Profibus slot index 168 80 168 81 168 82 Fieldbus format UInt Modbus format UInt 11 6 5 Timer2 650 Refer to the descriptions for Timer1 Timer 2 Trig 651 651 Timer2 Trig StpEy Off Default Off Selection 541 Same selections as Digital Output 1 menu Communication information Timer 2 Delay 653 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43452 649 Timerl Value Profibus slot index 170 101 StpFA 0 00 00 Fieldbus format UInt M f Ul Default 0 00 00 hr min sec odbus format nt Range 0 00 00 9 59 59 653 Timer2Delay StpEA 0 00 00 Default 0 00 00 hr min sec Range 0 00 00 9 59 59 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43453 hours 43454 minutes 43455 seconds Profibus slot index 170 102 170 103 170 104 Fieldbus format UInt Modbus format UInt Timer 2 T1 654 654 Timer StpEA
105. 41 Min Speed 0 343 Max Speed 1500 611 CA1 Value Anin1 612 CA1 Level HI 613 CA1 Level LO 16 3 2mA 20mA x 100 1296 2 4mA 20mA x 100 561 VIO 1 Dest RunR 562 VIO 1 Source CA1 215 Run Stp Ctrl Remote Reference signal AnIn1 20 mA Max speed l 1 1 l 1 1 1 1 4 mA i i 1 fi CA1 Level HI 16 a isis QN D scc a aC T ip au A fii N CA1 Level LO 12 2 4 mA mone spes ptf enm edm Sas ES epo EIS L4 4 T robot 009 04d po 3 d 1 i 1 TE 3 pO og ARE mM M t 1 f 1 EE 1 1 1 1 1 CA1 1 i 0p 0g I l i 1 1 poc 1 1 1 1 1 ii tll EH i i 1 I 1 1 1 l l 009 4d Mode roy jr a 1 I 3g I l 1 I 1 itl 1 iol 1 1 D T 1 D gt o id Functional Description 125 Communication information No Description The reference signal passes the Level LO value from 1 below positive edge the comparator CA1 output stays low mode RUN The reference signal passes the Level HI value from 2 below positive edge the comparator CA1 output is set high mode RUN The reference signal passes the threshold level of 4 mA 3 the motor speed will now follow the reference signal T During this period the motor speed will follow the refer ence signal 4 The reference signal reaches the threshold level motor speed is O rpm mode RUN The reference signal passes the Level HI value from 5 above negative edge t
106. 43043 in motor M1 contain the same type of information as 44043 in M2 A DeviceNet instance number can easily be converted into a Profibus slot index number according to descrip tion in section section 11 8 2 page 141 10 4 Start and stop commands Set start and stop commands via serial communica tion Modbus DeviceNet Integer Function Instance number value 42901 0 Reset Run active together with 42902 1 either RunR or RunL to perform start 42903 2 RunR 42904 3 RunL 10 5 Reference signal The reference value is set in modbus number 42905 0 4000 h corresponds to 0 100 of actual reference value 10 6 Description of the Elnt formats Modbus parameters can have different formats e g a standard unsigned signed integer or eint Elnt which is described below All parameters written to a register may be rounded to the number of significant digits used in the internal system If a parameter is in Eint format the 16 bit number should be interpreted like this F EEEE MMMMMMMMMMM F Format bit O Unsinged integer mode 1 Eint mode EEEE 2 complement signed exponent MMMMMMMMMMM 2 complement signed mantissa If the format bit is O then can a positive number O 32767 be represented by bit O 14 If the format bit is 1 then is the number interpreted as this Value M 10 E Example If you write the value 1004 to a register and this regis ter has 3 significant di
107. 5 95 120 150 35 70 95 240 Tightening torque Nm 14 24 14 24 Mains 06 F45 cables only Motor Fig 27 Stripping lengths for cables 3 5 1 Dimension of cables and fuses Please refer to the chapter Technical data section 14 6 page 165 Installation 19 3 6 Thermal protection on the motor Standard motors are normally fitted with an internal fan The cooling capacity of this built in fan is depend ent on the frequency of the motor At low frequency the cooling capacity will be insufficient for nominal loads Please contact the motor supplier for the cooling char acteristics of the motor at lower frequency WARNING Depending on the cooling characteristics of the motor the application the speed and the load it may be necessary to use forced cooling on the motor Motor thermistors offer better thermal protection for the motor Depending on the type of motor thermistor fitted the optional PTC input may be used The motor thermistor gives a thermal protection independent of the speed of the motor thus of the speed of the motor fan See the functions Motor lt type 231 and Motor I t current 232 3 7 Motors in parallel It is possible to have motors in parallel as long as the total current does not exceed the nominal value of the VSD The following has to be taken into account when setting the motor data Menu 221 The motors in
108. 624 to amp Set menu 625 to CD1 Menu 620 now holds the expression for Logic Y CA1 amp A2 amp CD1 which is to be read as CA1 amp A2 amp CD1 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43411 Profibus slot index 170 60 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Y Operator 1 622 Selects the first operator for the logic Y function 622 Y Operator 1 StpfN amp Default amp amp amp AND 0R A EXOR NOTE Set menu 624 to to finish the expression when only two comparators are required for Logic Y Y Comp 1 621 Selects the first comparator for the logic Y function Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43412 Profibus slot index 170 61 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Y Comp 2 623 Selects the second comparator for the logic Y function 621 Y Comp 1 StpfN CA1 623 Y Comp 2 Default CA1 B tpEN A2 CA1 0 Default 1A2 IAL 1 Selection Same as menu 621 CA2 2 IA2 3 Communication information CDi 4 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43413 1D1 5 Profibus slot index 170 62 ee B Fieldbus format Ulnt pe i Modbus format Ulnt LZ LY 8 ILZ LY 9 T1 10 IT1 11 T2 12 IT2 13 Functional Description 129 Y Operator 2 624 Selects the second operator for the logic Y f
109. A current signal like 0 4 20 mA is less sensitive to dis turbances than a 0 10 V signal because it is connected to an input which has a lower impedance 250 Q than a voltage signal 20 kQ It is therefore strongly advised to use current control signals if the cables are longer than a few metres 4 5 6 Twisted cables Analogue and digital signals are less sensitive to inter ference if the cables carrying them are twisted This is certainly to be recommended if screening cannot be used By twisting the wires the exposed areas are mini mised This means that in the current circuit for any possible High Frequency HF interference fields no voltage can be induced For a PLC it is therefore impor tant that the return wire remains in proximity to the sig nal wire It is important that the pair of wires is fully twisted over 360 4 6 Connecting options The option cards are connected by the optional connec tors X4 or X5 on the control board see Fig 28 page 21 and mounted above the control board The inputs and outputs of the option cards are connected in the same way as other control signals 26 Control Connections b Getting Started This chapter is a step by step guide that will show you the quickest way to get the motor shaft turning We will show you two examples remote control and local control We assume that the VSD is mounted on a wall or in a cabinet as in the chapter 2 page 9 First there is general informa
110. Automatic will use the optimal value accord ing to the internal model of motor User Defined can be selected when the start conditions of the application do not change and a high starting torque is always required A fixed IXR Compensation value can be set in the menu 353 NOTE This menu is visible only in V Hz mode 352 IxR Comp StpEX Off Default Off Off 0 Function disabled IXR Comp user 353 Only visible if User Defined is selected in previous menu 353 IxR CompUsr StpEX 0 0 Default 0 0 Range 0 25 x Unom 0 1 of resolution Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43143 Profibus slot index 169 47 Fieldbus format Long Modbus format EInt NOTE A too high level of IXR Compensation could cause motor saturation This can cause a Power Fault trip The effect of IXR Compensation is stronger with higher power motors Automatic 1 Automatic compensation User Defined 2 User defined value in percent Communication information NOTE The motor may be overheated at low speed Therefore it is important that the Motor I t Current 232 is set correctly Flux Optimization 354 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43142 Profibus slot index 169 46 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt 96 100 IxR Comp 25 25 Flux Optimization reduces the energy consumption and
111. B Overload Max Pre Alarm menu 4171 41B Min Pre Alarm menu 41B 4181 Underload Min Alarm menu 41B 4191 These default set levels can be manually changed in menus 416 to 419 After execution the message Autoset OK is displayed for 1s and the selection reverts to No Normal Load 41B Set the level of the normal load The alarm or pre alarm will be activated when the load is above under normal load margin 41B Normal Load StpEN 1005 Default 10096 Range 0 40096 of max torque NOTE 100 Torque means Iyom Imor The maximum depends on the motor current and VSD max current settings but the absolute maximum adjustment is 400 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43335 Profibus slot index 169 239 Fieldbus format Long 1 196 Modbus format EInt Load Curve 41C The load curve function can be used with any smooth load curve The curve can be populated with a test run or the values can be entered or changed manually Load Curve 1 9 41C1 41C9 The measured load curve is based on 9 stored sam ples The curve starts at minimum speed and ends at maximum speed the range in between is divided into 8 equal steps The measured values of each sample are displayed in 41C1 to 41C9 and can be adapted man ually The value of the 1st sampled value on the load curve is displayed 41C1 Load Curve
112. BB MENDES 66 BO BERI NER 66 Db Uer nro rere a 67 Fl MEM RENE 67 CL PORA NR AR 67 AY MENO EEPNCR 67 AA phe ee ia 68 CL NEHME 68 92 73 Pere en eee 68 OBO MN NEN 68 DEO Tue en rd n La a 68 Pl ENMEAP URRE 69 25B PME RD AE 69 OBC Ut casui ste ida 69 LAL ee rr rine a 69 liz NND 69 OBR MEER UR TEUER 70 BG RR ERROR 70 DBB nested der Id 70 13 RN RR RE 70 OS timate tues areas 70 25K NN MNNCEK 70 A epee eee en 71 Pls NENNEN EN 71 25N sls nia EU E 66 71 1 19 TRE MM EM 71 ORO veut ird oy ee dd 71 Pli MERE 19 Pics E 72 AIE ETE Le 72 LL A A E 72 DEO NER 73 QE Oy MONA EROR TERME 73 piv M EE 73 ASPEN NES 73 2622 EMEN HRRDRER 73 COI raen erent 73 WOT basics etiioisdd 73 BEBO BRE 73 2639 sacred ert 73 15S ee reassess 74 DEAN sedia ctia beg iti 74 CLs e eren M d ri 74 15 NM ETE 75 BOO RCRUM 75 EAEE ee RE 76 Aa dre e ei idm 76 C22 ERN M E 76 BOG MERERETUR 77 BOA caa Cete bands 78 SIS Ne de pir ro eee id 78 BOG ne vt dn LUXUS Pd 78 COA aC nen UE 79 coi ERROREM 79 Ci ik eee ue ed 80 eo RN eee EE 80 5 MAPS 80 38A esanian eian 81 EC iol DRE E ETT 81 SEIN QNT 81 57a ict chore a aai 82 338 consue Rd nadie 82 39djo cc cur able ceris 82 c VPN RE 83 Ee MERE erin fe 83 cio MPO 83 BOD joss err Et e T 84 CE etude c IU Rd 84 x ee ee ett 84 cic HT 85 GA joe nae Cra Ere d 85 OAD CCS 85 BAD MEHR E 86 944 itc sacrae sticadttessasti 86 ETS e corcuc cU E I
113. DC supply voltage location of the switches 12 Common Signal roura Table 15 Switch settings 15 Common Signal ground Input Signal type Switch Digital inputs Vol S1 i 8 Digln 1 RunL reverse oltage 9 Digln 2 RunR f d ADIRE S1 em Ua forward Current default 10 Digln 3 Off S2 U 16 Digln 4 Off Voltage Anin2 17 Digln 5 Off 8 Current default 92 y 18 Digln 6 Off S3 u 19 Digln 7 Off Voltage 22 Digln 8 RESET Anin3 3 Current default U Digital outputs 20 DigOut 1 Ready Voltage 2T 21 DigOut2 Brake Anin4 S4 Current default U Analogue inputs 2 Anin 1 Process Ref 3 Anin 2 Off NOTE Scaling and offset of AnIn1 AnIn4 can be d configured using the software See menus 512 515 4 Anin 3 Off 518 and 51B in section 11 5 page 109 5 Anln 4 Off Analogue outputs NOTE the 2 analogue outputs AnOut 1 and AnOut 2 can be configured using the software See menu 530 13 Speed Min speed to max speed section 11 5 3 page 117 14 Torque O to max torque Relay outputs SE NGI Relay 1 output 32 COM 1 Trip active when the VSD is in a 33 N O 1 TRIP condition 22 Control Connections 4 4 Connection example Fig 29 gives an overall view of a VSD connection exam ple L1 gg L2 ffilter ULL Alternative for potentiometer comtrol 1 2 0 10V 4 5 6 7 Default setting The switch S1 is set to U Fieldbus option or PC
114. Dec Rmp Linear 398 Lower Band 1096 339 Start Mode Normal DC 399 Start Delay Os 33A Spinstart Off 39A Stop Delay Os 33B Stop Mode Decel 39B Upp Band Lim 0 33C Brk Release 0 00s 39C Low Band Lim 0 33D Release Spd Orpm 39D _ Settle Start Os 33E Brk Engage 0 00s 39E TransS Start 60 33F Brk Wait 0 00s 39F Settle Stop Os 33G Vector Brake Off 39G _ TransS Stop 60 340 Speed 39H Run Time 1 00 00 00 341 Min Speed Orpm 39H1 Rst Run Tm1 No 342 Stp MinSpd Off 39 Run Time 2 00 00 00 343 Max Speed 1500rpm 3911 RstRun Tm2 No 344 SkipSpd 1 Lo Orpm 39J Run Time 3 00 00 00 345 SkipSpd 1 Hi Orpm 39J1 Rst Run Tm3 No 346 SkipSpd 2 Lo Orpm 39K Run Time 4 00 00 00 347 SkipSpd 2 Hi Orpm 39K1 Rst Run Tm4 No 348 Jog Speed 50rpm 39L Run Time05 00 00 00 350 Torques 39L1 Rst Run Tm5 No 351 Max Torque 12096 39M Run Time 6 00 00 00 352 IxR Comp Automatic 39M1 Rst Run Tm6 No 353 IxR CompUsr 096 39N Pump 123456 354 Flux optim Off 3A0 Crane Option 360 Preset Ref 3A1 Crane enable Off 361 Motor Pot Non Volatile 3A2 Control 4 Speed 362 Preset Ref 1 O rpm 3A3 Crane Relay 1 Brake 363 Preset Ref 2 P250 rpm 3A4 Crane Relay 2 Brake 172 Menu List DEFAULT CUSTOM DEFAULT CUSTOM
115. E TE 122 SO e ea tide ca access 139 Load parameter sets from Coh 55D assieme 123 TIL ramin ai 139 trol Panel 66 561 eben 123 P BLA asini 1394 u cir ree ee ae Parameter Set Selection 33 962 iis 124 32 iiia scia nte 139 Selacta Bareiaterset 64 563 56G ss 124 LBS vice ee 140 RAUS E ro o re 90 OLO niniin 124 331 unirii 140 PID Controller el poy QS QN 91 611 sisse 124 SOO ss iicet TAOS 3 es Le ee PS RT TRA SS Closed loop PID control 91 612 icem 126 810 risisti 140 Feedback signal annata 91 613 AE cie deerunt 127 811 Len ERENT 140 PID D Time ooo 92 181 PIDI Tile 91 PID P Gain 91 Power LED iii niit 42 Priority iier ein 34 Process Value 134 Product standard EMC 6 Programming eseessse 44 Protection class IP23 and IP54 151 PT10O Inputs 63 PIGIDDUt neto dern rne 63 Pump Fan Control 94 Q Quick Setup Card 5 R Reference Frequency uut 107 Motor potentiometer 116 Reference signal 54 75 Set reference value 75 TOFQUe tiones 108 View reference value 75 Reference control 55 Reference signal 55 Relay output ussss 122 Relay dic
116. Failure to follow these instructions can result in serious injury to the user in addition to serious damage to the variable speed drive HOT SURFACE Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury to the user EE Users This instruction manual is intended for installation engineers maintenance engineers operators service engineers Motors The variable speed drive is suitable for use with stand ard 3 phase asynchronous motors Under certain condi tions it is possible to use other types of motors Contact your supplier for details 1 1 Delivery and unpacking Check for any visible signs of damage Inform your sup plier immediately of any damage found Do not install the variable speed drive if damage is found The variable speed drives are delivered with a template for positioning the fixing holes on a flat surface Check that all items are present and that the type number is correct 1 2 Using of the instruction manual Within this instruction manual the abbreviation VSD is used to indicate the complete variable speed drive as a single unit Check that the software version number on the first page of this manual matches the software version in the variable speed drive With help of the index and the contents it is easy to track individual functions and to find out how to use and set them The Quick Setup Card can be put in a cabinet door so that it is always easy to access in case
117. Fault Error on power board Check mains supply voltage Fan Error Error infan modile Check for clogged air inlet filters in panel door and blocking material in fan module HCB Error Error in controlled rectifier module HCB Check mains supply voltage 148 Troubleshooting Diagnoses and Maintenance Table 31 Trip condition their possible causes and remedial action level Trip condition Possible Cause Remedy Desat Desat U Desat U Check on bad motor cable connections Desat V Failure in output stage Check on bad earth cable connections Desat V desaturation of IGBTs Check on water and moisture in the motor housing and cable connections Desat W Desat W Desat BCC Make sure all three phases are properly connected and that the terminal screws are tightened DC link error DC link voltage ripple exceeds maximum Check that the mains supply voltage is within the limits of the VSD Try to use other mains supply lines if dip is caused by other machinery PF Curr Err Error in current balancing Check motor Check fuses and line connections PF Overvolt Error in voltage balancing PF Comm Err Internal communication error Check motor Check fuses and line connections Contact service PF Int Temp Internal temperature too high Check internal fans PF Temp Err Malfunction in temperature sensor Contact service Check mains supply volta
118. I t ai PTC l t value is exceeded Overload on the motor according to the programmed l t settings Motor thermistor PTC exceeds maximum level NOTE Only valid if option board PTC PT100 is used Check on mechanical overload on the motor or the machinery bearings gearboxes chains belts etc Change the Motor l t Current setting Check on mechanical overload on the motor or the machinery bearings gearboxes chains belts etc Check the motor cooling system Self cooled motor at low speed too high load Set PTC menu 234 to OFF Motor PTC Motor thermistor PTC exceeds maximum level NOTE Only valid if 237 is enabled Check on mechanical overload on the motor or the machinery bearings gearboxes chains belts etc Check the motor cooling system Self cooled motor at low speed too high load Set PTC menu 237 to OFF Motor lost Phase loss or too great imbalance on the motor phases Check the motor voltage on all phases Check for loose or poor motor cable connections If all connections are OK contact your supplier Set motor lost alarm to OFF Locked rotor Torque limit at motor standstill Mechanical blocking of the rotor External input DigIn 1 8 active Check for mechanical problems at the motor or the machinery connected to the motor Set locked rotor alarm to OFF Check the equipment that initiates the external input Ext trip active low fu
119. L Run Time 89M Mains Time 89N Energy 8A0 Reset Trip No 900 System Data 920 VSD Data 921 VSD Type 922 Software 923 Unit name 0 Menu List 177 178 Menu List Index Symbols 10VDC Supply voltage 169 24VDC Supply voltage 169 Numerics 10VDC Supply voltage 169 Z 2O0WIA ice metodos 111 A Abbreviations ceeesssss 8 Acceleration sses 80 82 Acceleration ramp 82 Acceleration time 80 Ramp type sess 82 Alarm tripo iisi aisian 103 Alternating MASTER 95 Ambient temperature and derating 162 Analogue comparators 124 Analogue input 109 ANIA eee 109 Anln2 sees 113 114 Offs eliris niii 110 117 Analogue Output 117 119 169 AnOut 1 117 119 Output configuration 117 120 AND operator 128 Anlng us EXI EEE 114 ANNS rend aie 114 AMAA 4 cn niei 115 Autoreset 1 36 66 146 Autotune seeeessseseeeeee nennen 90 B Baudrate 44 73 74 Brake chopper 151 Brake function 83 84 Bake release time 83 Brake enini dre 84 Brake Engage Time 84 Brake wait time
120. LU 86 BIE ohh en 86 CAT ke one Meader 87 COAG C issued tastiera 87 Qatar abr ca ie 87 O54 nice INE e 88 BG Wiener cuts ARMEN 89 B62 ORDER 89 BGO cies caret 89 IGA EMO MERE 89 loc RENE ERIT 89 866 ceececccsssssccsscseccsesecesesessssees 89 Clots eee ere treu d 89 SEO neon cce tea tcd 89 E155 ee re nr RO oe 90 CSU scream hate 90 ETE BREED 90 STO DRM OMM CSS 91 171 ie ah oeune tities 91 GEHT suc Red aside 91 Bao NER EE 91 204 MEMO PNE 91 385 MR AMARE 92 SB cssc icericsns 92 OE ucc ort EE E EIS 92 388 MS MEA 93 5 9 tee ee here eda 93 GI aetna tied alata 94 393 ee ee de 94 Eie HE In 95 394 pene ARN 95 51 MN 96 BOB se auscee LE CEOs 96 COG vM 96 cis MERE ities 97 ccr MV 97 BO cc cer Ep ahs 97 ECGs BREMEN ENIM 98 39D sam cete ters ace fit 98 Cols DANI 98 BIP MO 99 180 39Q soient 99 614 127 811 841N 140 141 39H 39M 100 615 iarann 127 820 einem 141 410 iie 103 616 ini siae ans 127 SAO essaie tenue 141 T auos 103 61 0 V edes 128 900 Lied x 142 412 xis oec 103 618 iie eee 128 920 seien 142 A T3 eise needs 103 620 ris itineri oe rie 128 922 ilti Herr ire idee tee 142 414 inse 103 621 isis 128 129 Minimum Frequency 81 86 415 e EEE 104 622 Vineis deu 129 Monitor function 416 aceite 104 623 iiio eie 129 Alarm Select 1
121. M1 Default M1 M1 0 M2 1 Motor Data is connected to selected M3 2 motor M4 3 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43012 Profibus slot index 168 171 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Drive Mode 213 This menu is used to set the control mode for the motor Settings for the reference signals and read outs is made in menu Process source 321 Speed Mode offers an accurate control of the motor speed independently of the load The Speed mode also increases the accuracy of the different ana logue output signals that are related to the motor speed Speed mode can also be used if several motors of same type and size are connected in par allel Requires all motors to be mechanically con nected to the load Torque Mode can be selected for applications where the motor shaft torque needs to be controlled inde pendently of the speed e V Hz Mode output speed 712 in rpm is used when several motors in parallel of different type or size are connected or if parallel motors are not mechanically connected to the load 213 Drive Mode StpFA Speed Default Speed The VSD is speed controlled Reference given speed reference with ramp Speed and torque limits can be set Using direct torque control as motor control method Speed 0 54 Functional Description 213 Drive Mode Speed StpFA The VSD is torque controlled R
122. NOTE This RS232 port is not isolated Correct and safe use of a RS232 connection depends on the ground pins of both ports being the same potential Problems can occur when connecting two ports of e g machinery and computers where both ground pins are not the same potential This may cause hazardous ground loops that can destroy the RS232 ports The control panel RS232 connection is not galvanic isolated The optional RS232 485 card from TECO is galvanic isolated Note that the control panel RS232 connection can safely be used in combination with commercial available isolated USB to RS232 converters Parameter set A contains parameters 43001 to 43556 The parameter sets B C and D contains the same type of information For example parameter 43123 in parameter set A contain the same type of information as 44123 in parameter set B A DeviceNet instance number can easily be converted into a Profibus slot index number according to descrip tion in section section 11 8 2 page 141 Serial communication 47 10 3 Motor data Communication information for the different motors Motor Modbus DeviceNet Profibus Instance number Slot Index M1 43041 43048 168 200 to 168 207 M2 44041 44048 172 180 to 174 187 M3 45041 45048 176 160 to 176 167 M4 46041 46048 180 140 to 180 147 M1 contains parameters 43041 to 43048 The M2 M3 and M4 contains the same type of information For example parameter
123. Over volt On Normal The Trip LED is on Over speed On Normal The Trip relay or output is active if selected Under voltage On Normal LV The TRP status indication is displayed area D of Power Fault On Normal the display Desat On Normal Apart from the TRIP indicators there are two more indi DClink error On Normal cators to show that the inverter is in an abnormal sit uation Ovolt m cut On Normal T AX Over voltage Warnin VL Warning The inverter is close to a trip limit Safe stop Warning SST The Warning relay or output is active if selected Motor PTC On Normal The Trip LED is blinking LC Level AT Normal Soft LCL The accompanying warning message is displayed in window 722 Warning e One of the warning indications is displayed area F of the display Troubleshooting Diagnoses and Maintenance 145 12 2 Trip conditions causes and remedial action The table later on in this section must be seen as a basic aid to find the cause of a system failure and to how to solve any problems that arise A variable speed drive is mostly just a small part of a complete VSD sys tem Sometimes it is difficult to determine the cause of the failure although the variable speed drive gives a certain trip message it is not always easy to find the right cause of the failure Good knowledge of the com plete drive system is therefore necessary Contact your supplier if you have any questions The VSD is designed in s
124. Reset that are operated via the The inputs are activated by a transition for Run and Reset from low to high for Stop from high to low Edge 1 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43020 Profibus slot index 168 179 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt CAUTION Level controlled inputs DO NOT N comply with the Machine Directive if the inputs are directly used to start and stop the machine NOTE Edge controlled inputs can comply with the Machine Directive see the Chapter 8 page 39 if the inputs are directly used to start and stop the machine 11 2 3 Mains supply voltage 21B WARNING This menu must be set according to the VSD product lable and the supply voltage used Wrong setting might damage the VSD or brake resistor In this menu the nominal mains supply voltage con nected to the VSD can be selected The setting will be valid for all parameter sets The default setting Not defined is never selectable and is only visible until a new value is selected Once the supply voltage is set this selection will not be affected by the Load Default command 243 Brake chopper activation level is adjusted using the set ting of 21B NOTE The setting is affected by the Load from CP command 245 and if loading parameter file via digital inputs on the terminal strip The inputs a
125. Set the Motor Data Enter correct motor data for the connected motor The motor data is used in the calculation of complete oper ational data in the VSD Change settings using the keys on the control panel For further information about the control panel and menu structure see the chapter 9 page 41 Menu 100 Preferred View is displayed when started 1 Press 2 to display menu 200 Main Setup 2 Press i andthen 2 to display menu 220 Motor Data 3 Press i to display menu 221 and set motor volt age 4 Change the value using the and keys Con firm with zi Set motor frequency 222 Set motor power 223 Set motor current 224 Set motor speed 225 o ON Q O Set power factor cos q 227 10 Select supply voltage level used 21B 11 229 Motor ID run Choose Short confirm with zz and give start command Q The VSD will now measure some motor parameters The motor makes some beeping sounds but the shaft does not rotate When the ID run is finished after about one minute Test Run OK is displayed press to continue 12 Use AnIn1 as input for the reference value The default range is 4 20 mA If you need a O 10 V refer ence value change switch S1 on control board and set 512 Anin 1 Set up to O 10V 13 Switch off power supply 14 Connect digital and analogue inputs outputs as in Fig 36 15 Ready 16 Switch on power supply 5 3 4 Run the VSD Now the installat
126. TECO V33 Variable Speed Drive Instruction manual English Software version 4 2X TECO TECO V33 INSTRUCTION MANUAL ENGLISH Software version 4 2x Document number 01 4429 01 Edition r2 Date of release 15 05 2009 Copyright TECO 2005 2009 TECO retains the right to change specifications and illustrations in the text without prior notification The contents of this document may not be copied without the explicit permission of TECO Safety Instructions Instruction manual Read this instruction manual before using the Variable Speed Drive VSD Handling the variable speed drive Installation commissioning demounting taking meas urements etc of or on the variable speed drive may only be carried out by personnel technically qualified for the task The installation must be carried out in accordance with local standards Opening the variable speed drive WARNING Always switch off the mains voltage before opening the variable speed drive and wait at least 5 minutes to allow the buffer capacitors to discharge Always take adequate precautions before opening the variable speed drive Although the connections for the control signals and the switches are isolated from the main voltage do not touch the control board when the variable speed drive is switched on Precautions to be taken with a connected motor If work must be carried out on a connected motor or on the driven machine the mains voltag
127. To run the VSD it is not mandatory for the ID RUN to be executed but without it the performance will not be optimal NOTE If the ID Run is aborted or not completed the message Interrupted will be displayed The previous data do not need to be changed in this case Check that the motor data are correct Encoder Feedback 22B Only visible if the Encoder option board is installed This parameter enables or disables the encoder feedback from the motor to the VSD 22B Encoder StpEXMI Off Default Off On 0 Encoder feedback enabled Off 1 Encoder feedback disabled Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43051 60 Functional Description Profibus slot index 168 210 Fieldbus format UInt Modbus format UInt Encoder Pulses 22C Only visible if the Encoder option board is installed This parameter describes the number of pulses per rotation for your encoder i e it is encoder specific For more information please see the encoder manual 22C Enc Pulses StpEAMI 1024 Default 1024 Range 5 16384 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43052 Profibus slot index 168 211 Fieldbus format Long 171 pulse Modbus format EInt Encoder Speed 22D Only visible if the Encoder option board is installed This parameter shows the measured motor speed To check if th
128. Torque esses 53 87 Transition Frequency 98 TER chances i neret cfe eret dnce 42 Trip causes and remidial action 146 Trips warnings and limits 145 Twisted cables 26 TY PG 4e cede E E Fo uS 142 Type code number 5 U Underload yiia 38 Underload alarm 103 Unlock Code sse 56 Upper Band esses 96 Menu 397 96 Upper Band Limit 97 V V Hz Mode cessere 54 Vector Brake esses 85 Ventilation eeeeeeeeeee 59 View reference value 75 NOMA Stein Serhan 22 W Warping i dence neenon 140 182 TECO TECO Electric amp Machinery Co Ltd 10F No 3 1 Yuancyu St Nangang District Taipei City 115 Taiwan Tel 886 2 6615 9111 Fax 886 2 6615 0933 Internet www teco com tw Ver 02 2009 8
129. Virtual Connection 1 Destination 561 With this function the destination of the virtual connec tion is established When a function can be controlled by several sources e g VC destination or Digital Input the function will be controlled in conformity with OR logic See Digln for descriptions of the different selec tions 561 VIO 1 Dest StpEA Off Default Off Same selections as for Digital Input 1 Selection menu 521 Communication information Relay Modes 55D2 to 55DC Same function as for relay 1 mode 55D1 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43281 Profibus slot index 169 185 Fieldbus format UInt Modbus format UInt Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43277 43278 43521 43529 Profibus slot index 169 181 169 182 170 170 170 178 Fieldbus format UInt Modbus format Ulnt Functional Description 123 Virtual Connection 1 Source 562 With this function the source of the virtual connection is defined See DigOut 1 for description of the different selections 562 VIO 1 Source StpEN Off Default Off Selection Same as for menu 541 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43282 Profibus slot index 169 186 Fieldbus format UlInt Modbus format UInt Virtual Connections 2 8 563 to 56G Same function as virtual connect
130. Voltage 400 V Current 68A Power 37 kW Select variable speed drive The ambient temperature is 5 C higher than the maxi mum ambient temperature The following calculation is made to select the correct VSD model Derating is possible with loss in performance of 2 5 C Derating will be 5 X 2 5 12 5 Calculation for model JNVX40 0073 73 A 12 5 X 73 63 8754 this is not enough Calculation for model JNVX48 0090 90 A 12 5 X 90 78 75 A In this example we select the JNVX48 0090 162 Technical Data 14 4 Dimensions and Weights The table below gives an overview of the dimensions and weights The models 0003 to 0250 is available in IP54 as wall mounted modules The models 0300 to 1500 consist of 2 3 4 or 6 paralleled power electonic building block PEBB available in IP20 as wall mounted modules and in IP54 mounted standard cabinet Protection class IP54 is according to the EN 60529 standard Table 45 Mechanical specifications J NVX40 JNVX48 JNVX50 JNVX52 Models Frame Dim H x W x D mm Dim H x W x D mm Weight IP20 Weight IP54 size IP20 IP54 kg kg 0003 to 0018 B 350 416 x 203 x 200 125 0026 to 0046 C 440 512 x 178 x 292 24 0060 to 0073 X2 530 590 x 220 x 270 530 590 x 220 x 270 26 26 0090 to 0109 E 950 x 285 x 314 x 56 01460012755 E eox28x3144 6 0210 to 0250 F 950 x
131. a number of drives pumps fans etc of which one is always driven by the VSD Pump enable 391 This function will enable the pump control to set all rel evant pump control functions 391 Pump enable StpEA Off Default Off Off O Pump control is switched off Pump control is on Pump control parameters 392 to 39G On 1 appear and are activated according to default settings View functions 39H to 39M are added in the menu structure Number of Drives 392 Sets the total number of drives which are used includ ing the Master VSD The setting here depends on the parameter Select Drive 393 After the number of drives is chosen it is important to set the relays for the pump control If the digital inputs are also used for sta tus feedback these must be set for the pump control according to Pump 1 OK Pump6 OK in menu 520 392 No of Drives StpEA 1 Default 1 1 3 Number of drives if I O Board is not used Number of drives if Alternating MASTER is 1 6 used see Select Drive 393 I O Board is used Number of drives if Fixed MASTER is used 1 7 see Select Drive 393 I O Board is used Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43161 Profibus slot index 169 65 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt NOTE Used relays must be defined as Slave Pump or Master Pump Used digital inputs must be defined as
132. ade Min Value Max Value DC voltage OV 1000 V Anln1 Anln1 Function Min AnIn1 Function Max Anin2 Anln2 Function Min AnIn2 Function Max Anln3 Anln3 Function Min AnIn3 Function Max Anln4 Anln4 Function Min AnIn4 Function Max Communication information Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43257 Profibus slot index 169 161 Fieldbus format Long 0 001 Modbus format EInt NOTE It is possible to set AnOut1 up as an inverted output signal by setting AnOut1 Min gt AnOut1 Max See Fig 91 AnOut1 Function Value Max 5337 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43256 Profibus slot index 169 160 Long Fieldbus format 1720 1 W 0 1 Hz 0 1 A 0 1 V or 0 001 Modbus format EInt Anln1 Function Value Min 5335 With AnOut1 Function VaMin you define a user defined value for the signal Only visible when user defined is selected in menu 5334 With AnOut1 Function VaMax you define a user defined value for the signal Only visible when user defined is selected in menu 5334 5337 AnOut1VaMax StpRy 0 000 Default 0 000 Range 10000 000 10000 000 Communication information 5335 AnOut1VaMin StpfN 0 000 Default 0 000 Range 10000 000 10000 000 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43545 Profibus slot index 170 194 Long Speed 1 1 rpm Torque 12196 Proce
133. amp Type 338 Sets the ramp type of all deceleration parameters in a parameter set Fig 66 338 Dec Rmp StpFN Linear Default Linear Selection Same as menu 337 Communication information Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43107 Profibus slot index 169 11 Fieldbus format UInt Modbus format UInt rpm Linear S curve t Fig 65 Shape of acceleration ramp Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43108 Profibus slot index 169 12 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt S curve Linear gt t Fig 66 Shape of deceleration ramp Start Mode 339 Sets the way of starting the motor when a run com mand is given 339 Start Mode StpEN Normal DC Normal DC Default The motor flux increases gradually The motor shaft starts rotating immediately once the Run command is given Fast 0 After a Run command the motor will be magnetised first and the stator resistance is measured Depending on the motor time constant and the size of the motor it can take up to 1 3 s before the motor shaft starts to rotate This will provide better con4 trol of the motor when starting Normal DC 1 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43109 Profibus slot index 169 13 82 Functional Description Fieldbus format UInt Modbus forma
134. ance to your specific application NOTE Do not keep the Toggle key pressed for more than five seconds without pressing either the or Esc key as this may activate the Loc Rem function of this key instead See menu 217 9 2 4 Control keys The control keys are used to give the Run Stop or Reset commands directly As default these keys are disabled set for remote control Activate the control keys by selecting Keyboard in the menus Ref Control 214 and Reset Ctrl 216 If the Enable function is programmed on one of the dig ital inputs this input must be active to allow Run Stop commands from the control panel Table 20 Control keys gives a start with left rotation RUN L stops the motor or resets the VSD after a trip Q STOP RESET Add a menu to the toggle loop 1 Goto the menu you want to add to the loop 2 Press the Toggle key and keep it pressed while pressing the key Delete a menu from the toggle loop 1 Go to the menu you want to delete using the toggle key 2 Press the Toggle key and keep it pressed while pressing the key Delete all menus from the toggle loop 1 Press the Toggle key and keep it pressed while pressing the Esc key 2 Confirm with Enter The menu Preferred view 100 is displayed Default toggle loop Fig 51 shows the default toggle loop This loop con tains the necessary menus that need to be set before starting Press Toggle to ent
135. ation time may be longer than the value set Acceleration Time Motor Potentiometer 333 It is possible to control the speed of the VSD using the motor potentiometer function This function controls the speed with separate up and down commands over remote signals The MotPot function has separate ramps settings which can be set in Acc MotPot 333 and Dec MotPot 334 If the MotPot function is selected this is the accelera tion time for the MotPot up command The acceleration time is defined as the time it takes for the motor poten tiometer value to increase from O rpm to nominal speed 80 Functional Description 333 Acc MotPot 335 Acc Min Spd StpFA 16 0s StpEA 10 0s Default 16 0s Default 10 0s Range 0 50 3600 s Range 0 3600 s Communication information Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43103 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43105 Profibus slot index 169 7 Profibus slot index 169 9 Fieldbus format Long 120 01 s Fieldbus format Long 120 01 Modbus format EInt Modbus format EInt Deceleration Time Motor Potentiometer 334 If the MotPot function is selected this is the decelera tion time for the MotPot down command The decelera tion time is defined as the time it takes for the motor potentiometer value to decrease from nominal speed to O rpm 334 Dec MotPot Stp 16 0s Def
136. ault 16 0 s Range 0 50 3600 s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43104 Profibus slot index 169 8 Fieldbus format Long 1 0 01 Modbus format Elnt rpm Nom Speed 225 Max speed 343 Min speed 341 336 time Fig 64 Deceleration Time from Minimum Speed 336 If a minimum speed is programmed this parameter will be used to set the deceleration time from the minimum speed to O rpm at a stop command The ramp time is defined as the time it takes for the motor to decelerate from the nominal motor speed to O rpm Acceleration Time to Minimum Speed 335 If minimum speed 341 gt 0 rpm is used in an applica tion the VSD uses separate ramp times below this level With Acc MinSpeed 335 and Dec MinSpeed 336 you can set the required ramp times Short times can be used to prevent damage and excessive pump wear due too little lubrication at lower speeds Longer times can be used to fill up a system smoothly and pre vent water hammer due to rapidly exhausting air from the pipe system If a Minimum speed is programmed this parameter will be used to set the acceleration time to the minimum speed at a run command The ramp time is defined as the time it takes for the motor to accelerate from O rpm to nominal motor speed 336 Dec Min Spd StpEA 10 0s Default 10 0s Range 0 3600 s Communication information Modbus In
137. ault settings are calculated for a standard 4 pole motor without load according to the nominal power of the VSD 11 3 9 PID Process Control 380 The PID controller is used to control an external process via a feedback signal The reference value can be set via analogue input Anln1 at the Control Panel 310 by using a Preset Reference or via serial communication The feedback signal actual value must be connected to an analogue input that is set to the function Process Value Process PID Control 381 This function enables the PID controller and defines the response to a changed feedback signal Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43156 Profibus slot index 169 60 Fieldbus format Long 1 0 1 Modbus format EInt Process reference Process VSD Y PID Process feedback M 06 F95 381 PID Control StpEN Off Fig 74 Closed loop PID control PID Time 384 Setting the integration time for the PID controller 384 PID I Time StpRy 1 00s Default 1 00s Range 0 01 300 s Functional Description 91 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43157 Profibus slot index 169 61 Fieldbus format Long 120 01 s Modbus format EInt Process PID D Time 385 Setting the differentiation time for the PID controller 385
138. bus slot index 0 6 Fieldbus format UInt Modbus format UInt NOTE After reset the setting automatically reverts to No Mains time 732 Displays the total time that the VSD has been con nected to the mains supply This timer cannot be reset 732 Mains Time Stp h m s Unit h m s hours minutes seconds Range Oh Om Os 65535h 59m 59s Communication information 31028 hours Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 31029 minutes 31030 seconds Stp h m s Unit h m s hours minutes seconds Range Oh Om Os 65535h 59m 59s Communication information 31031 hours Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 31032 minutes 31033 seconds 121 172 121 173 121 174 Profibus slot index Profibus slot index 121 175 121 176 121 177 Fieldbus format UInt 121h m s Modbus format Ulnt 121h m s Fieldbus format Modbus format Ulnt 121h m s Ulnt 12 1h m s NOTE At 65535 h 59 m the counter stops It will not revert to Oh Om Functional Description 139 Energy 733 Displays the total energy consumption since the last energy reset 7331 took place Stp 733 Energy kWh Unit kWh Range 0 0 999999kWh Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 31034 Profibus slot index 121 178 Fieldbus format Long 121 W Modbus format
139. cables a Metal housin Brake Output resistor coils option option Metal connector housing Jt l Metal cable gland Motor fir Mains Fig 24 Variable speed drive as stand alone Connect motor cables 1 Remove the cable interface plate from the VSD housing 2 Put the cables through the glands Strip the cable according to Table 8 4 Connect the stripped cables to the respective motor terminal 5 Put the cable interface plate in place and secure with the fixing screws 6 Tighten the EMC gland with good electrical contact to the motor and brake chopper cable screens w Placing of motor cables Keep the motor cables as far away from other cables as possible especially from control signals The minimum distance between motor cables and control cables is 300 mm Avoid placing the motor cables in parallel with other cables The power cables should cross other cables at an angle of 90 Long motor cables If the connection to the motor is longer than 100 m 40 m for models 0003 0018 it is possible that capacitive current peaks will cause tripping at overcurrent Using output coils can prevent this Contact the supplier for appropriate coils Switching in motor cables Switching in the motor connections is not advisable In the event that it cannot be avoided e g emergency or maintenance switches only switc
140. cations Cable Cable specification Mains Power cable suitable for fixed installation for the voltage used Symmetrical three conductor cable with concen tric protection PE wire or a four conductor cable Motor with compact low impedance concentric shield for the voltage used Control cable with low impedance shield Control screened Brake chopper Mains motor Tightening torque Nm 1 2 1 4 1 2 1 4 Table 10 Model JNVX40 50 0060 to 0073 All cables 60A All cables 73 A Tightening torque Nm 1 5 3 2 Table 11 Model JNVX48 0090 to 0109 3 5 Stripping lengths Brake chopper Mains motor Fig 27 indicates the recommended stripping lengths Block mm 95 95 for motor and mains cables Cable diameter mm 16 95 16 95 Table 8 Stripping lengths for mains and motor cables Tightening torque Nm 14 14 Mains cable Motor cable Table 12 Model JNVX48 0146 to 0175 Model a b a b c mm mm mm mm mm Brake chopper Mains motor 2 0003 0018 90 10 90 10 20 Block mm 95 150 0026 0046 150 14 150 14 20 Cable diameter mm 16 95 35 95 120 150 0060 0073 130 11 130 11 34 Tightening torque Nm 14 14 24 0090 0175 160 16 160 167 41 Table 13 Model JNVX48 0210 to 0250 and JNVX69 0090 JNVX48 to 0175 0210 0250 JNVX69 0090 10 24 ads 24 ae Brake chopper Mains motor 0175 Ld CS LLL Block mm 150 240 Cable diameter mm 3
141. chine Directive see chapter EMC and Machine Directive if the inputs are directly used for starting and stopping the machine 36 Main Features See Fig 40 The Enable and Stop input must be active continuously in order to accept any run right or run left command The last edge RunR or RunL is valid Fig 42 gives an example of a possible sequence INPUTS ENABLE STOP i RUNR J fy E S RUN L OUTPUT STATUS Right rotation Left rotation Standstill 06 F94new_1 Fig 42 Input and output status for edge control 7 3 Performing an Identification Run To get the optimum performance out of your VSD motor combination the VSD must measure the electri cal parameters resistance of stator winding etc of the connected motor See menu 229 Motor ID Run It is recommended that the extended ID run be used before the motor is installed in the application If this is not possible the short ID run should be used WARNING During the extended ID RUN the J motor shaft will rotate Take safety measures to avoid unforeseen dangerous situations 7 4 Using the Control Panel Memory Data can be copied from the VSD to the memory in the control panel and vice versa To copy all data including parameter set A D and motor data from the VSD to the control panel select Copy to CP 244 Copy to CP To copy data from the control panel to the VSD enter
142. commands come from terminals 1 22 TL Torque Limit active Warning 722 Display the actual or last warning condition A warning occurs if the VSD is close to a trip condition but still in operation During a warning condition the red trip LED will start to blink as long as the warning is active 722 Warnings Stp warn msg The active warning message is displayed in menu 722 If no warning is active the message No Warning is dis played 136 Functional Description The following warnings are possible Fieldbus integer Warning message value 0 No Error 1 Motor I t 2 PTC 3 Motor lost 4 Locked rotor 5 Ext trip 6 Mon MaxAlarm 7 Mon MinAlarm 8 Comm error 9 PT100 10 Deviation 11 Pump 12 Ext Mot Temp 13 LC Level 14 Not used 15 Option 16 Over temp 17 Over curr F 18 Over volt D 19 Over volt G 20 Over volt M 21 Over speed 22 Under voltage 23 Power fault 24 Desat 25 DClink error 26 Int error 27 Ovolt m cut 28 Over voltage 29 Not used 30 Not used 31 Not used Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 31016 Profibus slot index 121 160 Fieldbus format Long Modbus format UInt See also the Chapter 12 page 145 Digital Input Status 723 Indicates the status of the digital inputs See Fig 101 1 Digin1 2 Digin2 3 Digin3 4 Digin4 5 Digin5 6 Digin 7 Digin 7 8
143. ct 411 Selects the types of alarms that are active 411 Alarm Select StpFA Off Default Off Off 0 No alarm functions active Min Alarm active The alarm output func Min 1 tions as an underload alarm Max 2 Max Alarm active The alarm output func tions as an overload alarm Both Max and Min alarm are active The Max Min 3 alarm outputs function as overload and underload alarms Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43321 Profibus slot index 169 225 Fieldbus format UInt Modbus format UInt Alarm Trip 412 Selects which alarm must cause a trip to the VSD 412 Alarm trip StpEA Off Default Off Selection Same as in menu 411 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43322 Profibus slot index 169 226 Fieldbus format UInt Modbus format UInt Ramp Alarm 413 This function inhibits the pre alarm signals during acceleration deceleration of the motor to avoid false alarms 413 Ramp Alarm StpfN Off Default off Pre alarms are inhibited during accelera off 0 tion deceleration Pre alarms active during acceleration On 1 deceleration Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43323 Profibus slot index 169 227 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Alarm Sta
144. d point format may be used The value will then be represented as B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 BS B4 B3 B2 B1 BO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Q9 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 Where bit 15 indicates that we are using the fixed point format F 0 Serial communication 51 52 Serial communication 11 Functional Description This chapter describes the menus and parameters in the software You will find a short description of each function and information about default values ranges etc There are also tables containing communication information You will find the Modbus DeviceNet and Fieldbus address for each parameter as well as the enumeration for the data NOTE Functions marked with the sign 8 cannot be changed during Run Mode Description of table layout 100 1st Line StpE 2nd Line Fig 56 Display functions 11 1 1 1st Line 110 Sets the content of the upper row in the menu 100 Preferred View 110 1st Line Stpf Process Val Menu no Menu name Status Selected value Default Selection or Integer value of ar f Description range selection Default Process Val Dependent on menu Process Val Process value Speed Speed Torque Torque Resolution of settings The resolution for all range settings described in this chapter is 3 significant digits Exceptions are speed val ues which are presented with 4 significant digits Table 22 shows the resolutions for 3 sig
145. dditional pump has slow start stop dynam ics then a higher transition speed should be used e fthe additional pump has fast start stop dynam ics then a lower transition speed should be used 39G TransS Stop StpfN 60 Default 60 Range 0 100 of total min speed to max speed Flow Pressure Transition speed decreases overshoot Time Fig 83 Effect of transition speed Settle Time Stop 39F The settle stop allows the process to settle after a pump is switched off before the pump control contin ues If an additional pump is stopped D O L Direct On Line or Y A the flow or pressure can still fluctuate due to the rough start stop method This could cause unnecessary starting and stopping of additional pumps During the Settle stop e PID controller is off the speed is kept at a fixed level after stopping a pump 39F Settle Stop StpEX 0s Default Os Range 0 999 s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43176 Profibus slot index 169 80 Fieldbus format Long 1 196 Modbus format EInt Example Max Speed 1500 rpm Min Speed 200 rpm TransS Start 6096 When less additional pumps are needed the speed will be controlled up to min speed 60 x 1500 rpm 200 rpm 200 rpm 780 rpm 980 rpm When this speed is reached the additional pump with the highest run time hours will be switched off Sp
146. de N O 52B B oard 1 Digln 3 Of 55DA B3R1 Mode N O 52C B oard 2 Digln 1 Of 55DB B3R2 Mode N O 52D B oard 2 Digln 2 Of 55DC B3R3 Mode N O 52E B oard 2 Digln 3 Of 560 Virtual I Os 52F B oard 3 Digln 1 Of 561 VIO 1 Des Off 52G B oard 3 Digln 2 Of 562 VIO 1 Source Off 52H B oard 3 Digln 3 Of 563 VIO 2 Des Off 530 An Outputs 564 VIO 2 Source Off 531 AnOut1 Fc Speed 565 VIO 3 Des Off 532 AnOut1 Setup 4 20mA 566 VIO 3 Source Off 533 AnOuti1 Adv 567 VIO 4 Des Off 5331 AnOut 1 Min 4mA 568 VIO 4 Source Off 5332 AnOut 1 Max 20 0mA 569 VIO 5 Des Off 5333 AnOut1Bipol 20 0mA 56A VIO 5 Source Off 5334 AnOut1 FcMin Min 56B VIO 6 Des Off 5335 AnOut1 VIMin 0 56C VIO 6 Source Off 5336 AnOut1 FcMax Max 56D VIO 7 Des Off 5337 AnOut1 VIMax 0 56E VIO 7 Source Off 534 AnOut2 FC Torque 56F VIO 8 Des Off 535 AnOut2 Setup 4 20mA 56G VIO 8 Source Off 536 AnOut2 Advan 600 Logical amp Timers 5361 AnOut 2 Min 4mA 610 Comparators 5362 AnOut 2 Max 20 0mA 611 CA1 Value Speed 5363 AnOut2Bipol 20 0mA 612 CA1 Level HI 300rpm 5364 AnOut2 FcMin Min 613 CA1 Level LO 200rpm 5365 AnOut2 VIMin 0 614 CA2 Value Torque 5366 AnOut2 FcMax Max 615 CA2 Level HI 2096 5367 AnOut2 VIMax 0 616 CA2 Level LO 1096 540 Dig Outputs 617 CD1 Run 541 DigOut 1 Ready 618 CD2 Digln 1 542 DigOut 2 Brake 620 Logic Output Y 550 Relays 621 YComp1 CA1 551 Relay 1 Trip 622 Y Operator 1 amp 552 Relay 2 Run 623 YComp2 IA2 553 Relay 3 Of 624 Y Operator 2 am
147. delay 4182 Sets the delay time between the first occurrence of min pre alarm condition and after when the alarm is given 4182 MinPreAlDel StpfN 0 1s Default 0 1s Range 0 90 s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43332 Profibus slot index 169 236 Fieldbus format Long 120 1 s Modbus format EInt Min Alarm 419 Min Alarm Margin 4191 With load type Basic 415 used the Min Alarm Margin sets the band under the Normal Load 41B menu that does not generate an alarm With load type Load Curve 415 used the Min Alarm Margin sets the band under the Load Curve 41C that does not generate an alarm The Max Alarm Margin is a percentage of nomi Min Pre Alarm Margin 4181 nal motor torque With load type Basic 415 used the Min Pre Alarm 419i MinAlarmMar Margin sets the band under the Normal Load 41B menu that does not generate a pre alarm With load StpEN 15 type Load Curve 415 used the Min Pre Alarm Margin Default 15 sets the band under the Load Curve 41C that does 0005 not generate a pre alarm The Min Pre Alarm Margin is ange j a percentage of nominal motor torque Communication information 4181 MinPreAlMar Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43329 SCpEN 10 Profibus slot index 169 233 Default 10 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 Range 0 400 Modbus format EInt Fu
148. dete 48 10 6 Description of the Elnt formats ssus 48 11 Functional Description 53 11 1 Preferred View 100 eese 53 11 1 1 1stLine 110 nin ree eene nete 53 11 1 2 2nd Line L20 2 ett e eres 54 11 2 Main Setup 200 essen 54 11 2 1 Operation 210 54 11 2 2 Remote Signal Level Edge 214 57 11 2 3 Mains supply voltage 21B sss 57 11 2 4 Motor Data 220 sss 58 11 2 5 Motor Protection 230 sess 61 11 2 6 Parameter Set Handling 240 64 11 2 7 Trip Autoreset Trip Conditions 250 66 11 2 8 Serial Communication 260 73 11 3 Process and Application Parameters 300 75 11 3 1 Set View Reference Value 310 75 11 3 2 Process Settings 320 sssssssssss 76 11 3 3 Start Stop settings 330 sss 80 11 3 4 Mechanical brake control sess 83 11 3 5 Speed 340 ii accro ieee 85 11 3 6 Torques 350 87 11 3 7 Preset References 360 sss 89 11 3 8 PI Speed Control 370 sess 90 11 3 9 PID Process Control 380 sess 91 11 3 10 Pump Fan Control
149. ding 245 Load from CP 8 StpFA No Copy Default No Copy No Copy 0 Nothing will be loaded A 1 Data from parameter set A is loaded B 2 Data from parameter set B is loaded C 3 Data from parameter set C is loaded D 4 Data from parameter set D is loaded ABCD 5 Data from parameter sets A B C and D are loaded A Mot 6 Parameter set A and Motor data are loaded B Mot 7 Parameter set B and Motor data are loaded C Mot 8 Parameter set C and Motor data are loaded D Mot 9 Parameter set D and Motor data are loaded ABCD Mot 10 Parameter sets A B C D and Motor data are loaded M1 11 Data from motor 1 is loaded M2 12 Data from motor 2 is loaded M3 13 Data from motor 3 is loaded M4 14 Data from motor 4 is loaded oe 15 Data from motor 1 2 3 and 4 are loaded All 16 All data is loaded from the control panel Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43025 Profibus slot index 168 184 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt NOTE Loading from the control panel will not affect the value in menu 310 11 2 7 Trip Autoreset Trip Conditions 250 The benefit of this feature is that occasional trips that do not affect the process will be automatically reset Only when the failure keeps on coming back recurring at defined times and therefore cannot be solved by the VSD w
150. down See Table 37 for the contacts connections To monitor the Enable function the selection RUN on a digital output can be used For setting a digital out put e g terminal 20 in the example Fig 113 please refer to section 11 5 4 page 120 540 When the Inhibit input is de activated the VSD display will show a blinking SST indication in section D bot tom left corner and the red Trip LED on the Control panel will blink To resume normal operation the following steps have to be taken Release Inhibit input 24Vpc High to terminal 1 and 2 Give a STOP signal to the VSD according to the set Run Stop Control in menu 215 Give a new Run command according to the set Run Stop Control in menu 215 NOTE The method of generating a STOP command is dependent on the selections made in Start Signal Level Edge 21A and the use of a separate Stop input via digital input WARNING The safe stop function can never be used for electrical maintenance For electrical maintenance the VSD should always be disconnected from the supply voltage Fig 112 Connection of safe stop option in size E and up Table 37 Specification of Safe Stop option board i Name Function Specification 1 Inhibit Inhibit driver circuits of DC 24 V 2 Inhibit power conductors 20 30 V NO contact 2 2 relay K Feedback confirmation 48 Vpc P contact Of
151. e HI to allow any Run signal If the input is made LOW the output of the VSD is immedi ately disabled and the motor will coast CAUTION If the Enable function is not N programmed to a digital input it is considered to be active internally Stop If the input is low then the VSD will stop according to the selected stop mode set in menu 33B Stop Mode Fig 39 shows the function of the Enable and the Stop input and the Stop Mode Decel 33B To run the input must be high NOTE Stop Mode Coast 33B will give the same behaviour as the Enable input Main Features 35 STOP STOP DECEL OUTPUT SPEED ENABLE OUTPUT SPEED 06 F104 NG or if Spinstart is selected Fig 39 Functionality of the Stop and Enable input Reset and Autoreset operation If the VSD is in Stop Mode due to a trip condition the VSD can be remotely reset by a pulse low to high transition on the Reset input default on Digln 8 Depending on the selected control method a restart takes place as follows Level control If the Run inputs remain in their position the VSD will start immediately after the Reset command is given Edge control After the Reset command is given a new Run command must be applied to start the VSD again Autoreset is enabled if the Reset input is continuously active The Autoreset functions are programmed in menu Autoreset 250 NOTE If the control commands
152. e encoder is correctly installed set Encoder 23B to Off run the VSD at any speed and compare with the value in this menu The value in this menu 22D should be about the same as the motor speed 712 If you get the wrong sign for the value swap encoder input A and B 22D Enc Speed Stp YM XXrpm Unit rpm Resolution speed measured via the encoder Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 42911 Profibus slot index 168 70 Fieldbus format Int Modbus format Int 11 2 5 Motor Protection 230 This function protects the motor against overload based on the standard IEC 60947 4 2 Motor I t Type 231 The motor protection function makes it possible to pro tect the motor from overload as published in the stand ard IEC 60947 4 2 It does this using Motor I2t Current 232 as a reference The Motor I2t Time 233 is used to define the time behaviour of the function The cur rent set in 232 can be delivered infinite in time If for instance in 233 a time of 1000 s is chosen the upper curve of Fig 59 is valid The value on the x axis is the multiple of the current chosen in 232 The time 233 is the time that an overloaded motor is switched off or is reduced in power at 1 2 times the current set in 232 231 Mot I t Type StpENMI Trip Default Trip Off 0 I t motor protection is not active When the l t time is exceeded the VSD will Trip 1
153. e for the output signal See Fig 90 Frequency 5 Actual frequency The scale of the voltage controlled output that controls the full range for the output rent e Actual current URBEM E signal Can be defined by the advanced El power 7 Actual electrical power AnOut Min and AnOut Max menus Output volt 8 Actual output voltage Sets the output for a bipolar voltage out 7 put where the scale controls the range DC voltage 9 Actual DC link voltage User Bipol V 7 for the output signal Scale can be Anini 10 Mirror of received signal value on defined in advanced menu AnOut Bipol Anln1 Mirror of received signal value on Communication information Anin2 11 Anin2 Anin3 42 Mirror of received signal value on Modbus Instance no DeviceNet noi 43252 nin Anin3 Profibus slot index 169 156 Aida 13 Mirror of received signal value on Fieldbus format UInt Anin4 Modbus format Ulnt NOTE When selections Anin1 Anin2 AnIn4 is selected the setup of the AnOut menu 532 or 535 has to be set to 0 10V or 0 20mA When the AnOut Setup i t to e g 4 20mA the mirroring i t ki Ref is set to e g mA the mirroring is not working Ref VSD 1 e VSD 2 correct Master Slave 7 AnOut Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43251 Profibus slot index 169 155 Fig 93 Fieldbus format UInt Modbus format UInt Functional Description 117 AnOut1 Advanced 533 With the functions in the AnOut1 Advanced menu the
154. e must always be disconnected from the variable speed drive first Wait at least 5 minutes before starting work Earthing The variable speed drive must always be earthed via the mains safety earth connection Earth leakage current This variable speed drive has an earth leakage current which does exceed 3 5 mA AC Therefore the minimum size of the protective earth conductor must comply with the local safety regulations for high leakage current equipment which means that according the standard IEC61800 5 1 the protective earth connection must be assured by one of following conditions 1 Use a protective conductor with a cable cross sec tion of at least 10 mm for copper Cu or 16 mm for aluminium Al 2 Use an additional PE wire with the same cable cross section as the used original PE and mains supply wiring Residual current device RCD compatibility This product cause a DC current in the protective con ductor Where a residual current device RCD is used for protection in case of direct or indirect contact only a Type B RCD is allowed on the supply side of this prod uct Use RCD of 300 mA minimum EMC Regulations In order to comply with the EMC Directive it is abso lutely necessary to follow the installation instructions All installation descriptions in this manual follow the EMC Directive Mains voltage selection The variable speed drive may be ordered for use with the mains voltage range listed below
155. e option will also give backup for com munication failure if main power is lost The standby supply board option is supplied with exter nal 10 24 Vpc or 24 Vac protected by a 2 A slow acting fuse from a double isolated transformer The terminals X1 1 and X1 2 are voltage polarity independent X1 1 Left terminal Mustbe x4 5 Right terminal double isolated Fig 110 Connection of standby supply option Table 36 X1 g E Name Function Specification terminal 1 Ext supply 1 Pxternal Wee main 24 Voc or 24 power independ Van 10 ent supply voltage C 7 Double iso 2 Ext supply 2 for control and com lated munication circuits 13 8 Safe Stop option To realize a Safe Stop configuration in accordance with EN954 1 Category 3 the following three parts need to be attended to 1 Inhibit trigger signals with safety relay K1 via Safe Stop option board 2 Enable input and control of VSD via normal I O con trol signals of VSD 3 Power conductor stage checking status and feed back of driver circuits and IGBT s To enable the VSD to operate and run the motor the fol lowing signals should be active Inhibit input terminals 1 DC and 2 DC on the Safe Stop option board should be made active by connecting 24 Vpc to secure the supply voltage for the driver circuits of the power conductors via safety relay K1 See also Fig 113 High signal on the digi
156. e parameter set This is the most common application for pumps and fans Once default motor M1 and parameter set A have been selected 1 Enter the settings for motor data 2 Enter the settings for other parameters e g inputs and outputs 7 1 2 One motor and two parameter sets This application is useful if you for example have a machine running at two different speeds for different products Once default motor M1 is selected 1 Select parameter set A in menu 241 2 Enter motor data in menu 220 3 Enter the settings for other parameters e g inputs and outputs 4 If there are only minor differences between the set tings in the parameter sets you can copy parameter Set A to parameter set B menu 242 5 Enter the settings for parameters e g inputs and outputs Note Do not change motor data in parameter set B 7 1 3 Two motors and two parameter sets This is useful if you have a machine with two motors that can not run at the same time such as a cable winding machine that lifts up the reel with one motor and then turns the wheel with the other motor One motor must stop before changing to an other motor 1 Select parameter set A in menu 241 2 Select motor M1 in menu 212 3 Enter motor data and settings for other parameters e g inputs and outputs 4 Select parameter set B in menu 241 5 Select M2 in menu 212 Enter motor data and settings for other parameters e g
157. e starts counting when the fault is gone When the time delay has elapsed the alarm will be reset if NOTE An auto reset is delayed by the remaining ramp time the function is active 254 Overvolt G StpEAX Off Over temperature 252 Default Off Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone Off 0 Off When the time delay has elapsed the alarm will be reset if the function is active 1 3600 2 990 173600 5 Communication information 252 Overtemp StpEA Off Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43076 Default Off Profibus slot index 168 235 Off 0 Off Fieldbus format Long 1 1s 1 3600 1 3600 1 3600 s Modbus format Elnt Functional Description 67 Overvolt 255 Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone When the time delay has elapsed the alarm will be reset if the function is active Communication information 255 Overvolt Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43086 Profibus slot index 168 245 Fieldbus format Long 1721s Modbus format EInt StpfN Off Default Off Off 0 Off 1 3600 1 3600 1 3600 s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43077 Profibus slot index 168 236 Fieldbus format Long 1 1s Modbus format EInt Motor Lost 256 Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone When the time delay has elapsed the alarm
158. e torque Nm ft Ibf Nm ft Ibf Nm ft Ibf JNVX48 0003 JNVX48 0004 JNVX48 0006 JNVX48 0008 AWG 20 AWG6 13 1 AWG20 AWG6 1 3 1 AWG 14 AWG6 2 6 2 Copper Cu JNVX48 0010 60 C JNVX48 0013 JNVX48 0018 JNVX48 0019 JNVX48 0026 output current JNVX48 0031 lt AAA Copper i Cu 60 C JNVX48 0037 AWG 12 AWG 4 1 3 1 AWG 12 AWG 4 13 1 AWG 8 ANG 2 2 6 2 output current 244A Copper JNVX48 0046 Cu 75 C JNVX50 0060 AWG 12 AWG 4 1 6 1 2 AWG 12 AWG 4 1 6 1 2 AWG 12 AWG 4 1 6 1 2 JNVX48 0090 i AWG 4 AWG 3 0 44 10 5 AWG 4 AWG 3 0 14 a JNVX48 0109 AWG 4 AWG 2 0 10 7 5 AWG 4 AWG 3 0 14 10 5 JNVX480146 AWG 1 AWG 3 0 14 10 5 AWG 1 AWG3 O 14 10 5 JNVX48 0175 AWG 4 0 300 kcmil 24 18 AWG 4 AWG 2 0 10 7 5 JNVX48 0210 z i EE 24 18 Nd 2 ES mE DESCR ve AE i al JNVX48 0250 400 kcmil kemi 24 18 kcmil 10 7 5 JNVX48 0300 SG 24 18 2XAWG 3 0 24 18 frame JNVX48 0375 2 X 300 kcmil 2 x 400 kcmil Copper Cu 1526 JNVX48 0430 j 7 ERE a ae E EEN e 24 18 frame JNVX48 0500 2 X 400 kcmil 2 x 400 kcmil JNVX48 0600 3x AWG 4 O 2 x AWG 3 0 JNVX48 0650 3 x 300 kemil 24 18 2 x 400 kemil 24 18 frame JNVX48 0750 JNVX48 0860 T 2 MIN Siete hae wide AY 24 18 frame JNVX48 1000 4 x 300 kcmil 3x 400 kcmil JNVX48 1200 E 8X AWG 4 0 24 18 OXAWG 3 0 24 18 frame JNVX48 1500 6 x 300 kcmil 6 x 400 kemil 168 Technical Data 14 7 Control signals
159. e used for thermal protection Deselecting not used PT100 inputs on the PTC PT100 option board in order to ignore those inputs i e extra external wiring is not needed if port is not used 236 PT100 Inputs StpE PT100 142 43 Default PT100 14243 PT100 1 PT100 2 PT100 1 2 PT100 Selection 3 PT100 1 3 PT100 2 3 PT100 1 2 3 PT100 1 1 Channel 1 used for PT100 protection PT100 2 2 Channel 2 used for PT100 protection PT100 1 2 3 Channel 1 2 used for PT100 protection PT100 3 4 Channel 3 used for PT100 protection PT100 1 3 5 Channel 1 3 used for PT100 protection PT100 243 6 Channel 2 3 used for PT100 protection PT100 14243 7 nil 1 2 3 used for PT100 protec Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43066 Profibus slot index 168 225 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt NOTE This menu is only valid for PT 100 thermal protection Motor PTC 237 In this menu the internal motor PTC hardware option is enabled This PTC input complies with DIN 44081 44082 Please refer to the manual for the PTC PT100 option board for electrical specification This menu is only visible if a PTC or resistor 2 kOhm is connected to terminals X1 78 79 Functional Description 63 To enable the function 1 Connect the thermistor wires to X1 78 79 or for testing the input connect a resistor to the terminals Use resistor value between 50 and 2000 ohm
160. echanical brake holds the load when the VSD is not running To prevent the load from falling down a holding torque must be initiated before the mechanical brake is released On the other hand when stopping hoisting the brake must be activated before the holding torque is removed Brake Release Time 33C The Brake Release Time sets the time the VSD delays before ramping up to whatever final reference value is selected During this time a predefined speed can be generated to hold the load where after the mechanical brake finally releases This speed can be selected at Release Speed 33D Immediate after the brake release time expiration the brake lift signal is set The user can set a digital output or relay to the function Brake This output or relay can control the mechanical brake Stop Mode 33B When the VSD is stopped different methods to come to a standstill can be selected in order to optimize the stop and prevent unnecessary wear Stop Mode sets the way of stopping the motor when a Stop command is given 33B Stop Mode StpEN Decel Default Decel The motor decelerates to O rpm according Decel 0 j to the set deceleration time Coast 1 The motor freewheels naturally to O rpm Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43111 33C Brk Release StpEX 0 00s Default 0 00s Range 0 00 3 00 s Communication information
161. ed of the pump reaches the upper band limit the next pump is started immediately without delay If a start delay is used this delay will be ignored Range is between 0 equalling max speed and the set percent age for the UpperBand 397 39B Upp Band Lim StpEX 0 Default 0 O to Upper Band level 0 max speed means Range that the Limit function is switched off Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43171 Profibus slot index 169 75 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 Modbus format Elnt Speed next pump starts immediately Max leienda te TD Upper band Dyt dimit 39B Y Upper band lt gt N Min 2222 s 22 2 2525 1t 4 T a E Flow Pressure Start Delay 399 NG_50 PC 14_2 Fig 80 Upper band limit Functional Description 97 Lower Band Limit 39C If the speed of the pump reaches the lower band limit the top pump is stopped immediately without delay If a stop delay is used this delay will be ignored Range is from 0 equalling min speed to the set percentage for the Lower Band 398 39C Low Band Lim St pe 0 Default 096 O to Lower Band level 096 min speed means Range that he Limit function is switched off Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43172 Profibus slot index 169 76 Fieldbus format Long 1 196 Modbus forma
162. ed on both sides In this way a so called Faraday cage is cre ated around the VSD motor cables and motor The RFI currents are now fed back to their source the IGBTs so the system stays within the emission levels Recommendations for selecting motor cables Use screened cables according to specification in table 7 Use symmetrical shielded cable three phase conductors and a concentric or otherwise symmetrically constructed PE conductor and a shield When the conductivity of the cable PE conductor is 5096 of the conductivity of the phase conductor a separate PE conductor is required Use heat resistant cables 60 C or higher Dimension the cables and fuses in accordance with the nominal output current of the motor See table 49 page 165 Keep the motor cable between VSD and motor as short as possible The screening must be connected with a large con tact surface of preferable 360 and always at both ends to the motor housing and the VSD housing When painted mounting plates are used do not be afraid to scrape away the paint to obtain as large contact surface as possible at all mounting points for items such as saddles and the bare cable screening Relying just on the connection made by the screw thread is not sufficient NOTE It is important that the motor housing has the same earth potential as the other parts of the machine The litz ground connection see fig 24 is only nec essa
163. eed Actual shut down of pump Master pump s Trans p M00 Additional pump Flow Pressure Communication information Switch off procedure starts Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43175 Profibus slot index 169 79 Fieldbus format Long 1721s Modbus format EInt Fig 84 Transition speed stop Functional Description 99 Run Times 1 6 39H to 39M 11 3 11 Crane Option 3A0 Settings for the optional Crane board Crane Remote 39H Run Time 1 nn das card See also the Crane option instruc StpEX h mm Unit h m hours minutes NOTE This menu is only visible if the crane board is connected to the VSD Range Oh 0m 65535h 59m Communication information Crane enable 3A1 When the crane option board is connected it is possi 31051 hours 31052 minutes ble to de activate the crane option board inputs 31054 hours 31055 minutes Modbus Instance no 31057 hours 31058 minutes NOTE Deviation function is active even if 3A1 off DeviceNet no 31060 hours 31061 minutes 31063 hours 31064 minutes 31066 hours 31067 minutes 3A1 Crane enable 121 195 121 198 121 201 StpFAX On PROUIDUS BIOVARISS 121 204 121 207 121 210 Default Off Fieldbus format UInt Off O Crane option board deactivated Modbus format Ulnt On 1 Crane option board activated Reset Run Times 1 6 39H1 to 39M1
164. eference given torque reference without ramp Speed and torque limit can be set Using Torque 1 direct torque control as motor control method NOTE No ramps active in the VSD Care must be taken All control loops are related to frequency control NOTE All the functions and menu read outs with regard to speed and rpm e g Max Speed 1500 rpm Min Speed 0 rpm etc remain speed and rpm although they represent the output frequency V Hz 2 Communication information Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43014 Profibus slot index 168 173 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Run Stop Control 215 This function is used to select the source for run and stop commands Start stop via analogue signals can be achieved by combining a few functions This is described in the Chapter 7 page 33 215 Run Stp Ctrl Remote StpEN Default Remote The start stop signal comes from the digital Remote 9 inputs of the terminal strip terminals 1 22 Keyboard 1 Start and stop is set on the Control Panel Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43013 Profibus slot index 168 172 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt The start stop is set via the serial communi4 Com 2 cation RS 485 Fieldbus See Fieldbus or RS232 485 option manual for details Reference control 214 To control the speed of the motor the
165. elect read write to control the inverter over a fieldbus network For further information see the Fieldbus option manual 2633 Read Write S tp RW Default RW RW 0 Read 1 Valid for process data Select R read only for logging proc ess without writing process data Select RW in normal cases to control inverter Functional Description 73 Additional Process Values 2634 Define the number of additional process values sent in cyclic messages 2634 AddPrValues StpfN 0 Default 0 Range 0 8 Communication Fault 264 Main menu for communication fault warning settings For further details please see the Fieldbus option man ual Communication Fault Mode 2641 Selects action if a communication fault is detected 2641 ComFlt Mode StpfN Off Default Off Off O0 No communication supervision RS232 485 selected The VSD will trip if there is no communica tion for time set in parameter 2642 Fieldbus selected The VSD will trip if 1 The internal communication between the control board and fieldbus option is lost for time set in parameter 2642 2 If a serious network error has occurred RS232 485 selected The VSD will give a warning if there is no communication for time set in parameter 2642 Fieldbus selected The VSD will give a warning if 1 The internal communication between the control board and fieldbus option is los
166. election Same as in menu 512 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43232 Profibus slot index 169 136 Fieldbus format UInt Modbus format UInt AnIn4 Advanced 51C Same functions and submenus as under AnIn1i Advanced 513 51C AnIn4 Advan StpEN Communication information 43233 43240 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43544 43554 169 137 144 Profibus slot index 170 193 170 203 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43231 Profibus slot index 169 135 NOTE Additional inputs will become available when the Fieldbus format Ulnt 1 0 option boards are connected Modbus format Ulnt Digital Input 1 521 To select the function of the digital input On the standard control board there are eight digital inputs If the same function is programmed for more than one input that function will be activated according to OR logic if nothing else is stated 521 DigIn 1 StpEN RunL Default RunL Off O The input is not active VSD ramps to stop and prevents rotation in R direction clockwise when the signal Lim Switch 1 is low NOTE The Lim Switch is active low NOTE Activated according to AND logic VSD ramps to stop and prevents rotation in L direction counter clockwise when the Lim Switch 2 signal is low NOTE The Lim Switch is active low NOTE Activated according to AND logic Be a
167. emote 0 The command comes from the inputs of the terminal strip terminals 1 22 Keyboard 4 The command comes from the command y keys of the Control Panel Com 2 The command comes from the serial communication RS 485 Fieldbus Remotes The command comes from the inputs of 3 the terminal strip terminals 1 22 or the Keyb keyboard Functional Description 55 The command comes from the serial T com 4 communication RS485 Fieldbus or the Keyb keyboard The command comes from the inputs of Rem Keyb the terminal strip terminals 1 22 the Com keyboard or the serial communication RS485 Fieldbus The command comes from an option Only available if the option can control the reset command Option 6 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43016 Profibus slot index 168 175 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Local Remote key function 217 The Toggle key on the keyboard see section 9 2 5 page 42 has two functions and is activated in this menu As default the key is just set to operate as a Tog gle key that moves you easily through the menus in the toggle loop The second function of the key allows you to easily swap between Local and normal operation set up via 214 and 215 of the VSD Local mode can also be activated via a digital input If both 2171 and 2172 is set to Standard the function is disabled
168. en the variable speed drive is tripped or powered down 55D Relay Adv StpEN Relay 1 Mode 55D1 55D1 Relay Mode StpFA N O Default N O N O 0 The normal open contact of the relay will be activated when the function is active N C 1 active The normally closed contact of the relay will act as a normal open contact The contact will be opened when function is not active and closed when function is Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43276 Profibus slot index 169 180 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt 11 5 6 Virtual Connections 560 Functions to enable eight internal connections of com parator timer and digital signals without occupying physical digital in outputs Virtual connections are used to wireless connection of a digital output function to a digital input function Available signals and control functions can be used to create your own specific func tions Example of start delay The motor will start in RunR 10 seconds after Digln1 gets high Digln1 has a time delay of 10 s Menu Parameter Setting 521 Digln1 Timer 1 561 VIO 1 Dest RunR 562 VIO 1 Source T1Q 641 Timer41 Trig Digln 1 642 Timer1 Mode Delay 643 Timer1 Delay 0 00 10 NOTE When a digital input and a virtual destination are set to the same function this function will act as an OR logic function
169. enu 612 o Adjustable Level LO 4 Menu 613 NG 06 F125 Fig 94 Analogue Comparator 611 CA1 Value StpEN Speed Default Speed Process Val 0 Set by Unit 310 Speed 1 rom Torque 2 Shaft Power 3 kW El Power 4 kW Current 5 A Output Volt 6 V Frequency 7 Hz DC Voltage 8 V Heatsink Tmp 9 C PT100_1 10 C PT100_2 11 C PT100_3 12 C Energy 13 kWh Run Time 14 h Mains Time 15 h Anln1 16 Anin2 17 Anin3 18 Anln4 19 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43401 Profibus slot index 170 50 Fieldbus format UInt Modbus format UInt Example Create automatic RUN STOP signal via the analogue reference signal Analogue current reference signal 4 20 mA is connected to Analogue Input 1 AnIn1 Setup menu 512 4 20 mA and the threshold is 4 mA Full scale 100 input signal on Anin 1 20 mA When the reference signal on AnIn1 increases 80 of the thresh old 4 mA x 0 8 3 2 mA the VSD will be set in RUN mode When the signal on AnIn1 goes below 60 of the threshold 4 mA x 0 6 2 4 mA the VSD is set to STOP mode The output of CA1 is used as a virtual connec tion source that controls the virtual connection destina tion RUN Menu Function Setting 511 Anln1 Function Process reference 512 Anin1 Set up 4 20 mA threshold is 4 mA 3
170. er Short or Extended and press Enter Then press RunL or RunR on the control panel to start the ID run If menu 219 Rotation is set to L the RunR key is inactive and vice versa The ID run can be aborted by giving a Stop com mand via the control panel or Enable input The param eter will automatically return to OFF when the test is completed The message Test Run OK is displayed Before the VSD can be operated normally again press the STOP RESET key on the control panel During the Short ID run the motor shaft does not rotate The VSD measures the rotor and stator resistance During the Extended ID run the motor is powered on and rotates The VSD measures the rotor and stator resistance as well as the induction and the inertia for the motor 229 Motor ID Run StpPAMI Off Default Off see Note Off O Not active Parameters are measured with injected DC Short T current No rotation of the shaft will occur Additional measurements not possible to perform with DC current are done directly after a short ID run The shaft will rotate and must be disconnected from the load Extended 2 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43049 Profibus slot index 168 208 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt WARNING During the extended ID RUN the AN motor will rotate Take safety measures to avoid unforeseen dangerous situations NOTE
171. er menu 211 then use the 42 Operation via the Control Panel Next key to enter the sub menus 212 to 21A and enter the parameters When you press the Toggle key again menu 221 is displayed A Sub menus X r Bo X 212 a y 511 Toggle loop 211 r3 C oc REM 341 221 fam Me p ee Sub menus 100 1 EM 7 x Indication of menus in toggle loop Menus included in the toggle loop are indicated with a By in area B in the display Fig 51 Default toggle loop Loc Rem function The Loc Rem function of this key is disabled as default Enable the function in menu 2171 and or 2172 With the function Loc Rem you can change between local and remote control of the VSD from the control panel The function Loc Rem can also be changed via the Digln see menu Digital inputs 520 Change control mode 1 Press the Loc Rem key for five seconds until Local or Remote is displayed 2 Confirm with Enter 3 Cancel with Esc Local mode Local mode is used for temporary operation When switched to LOCAL operation the VSD is controlled via the defined Local operation mode i e 2171 and 2172 The actual status of the VSD will not change
172. es ATTI a DETAIL A Fig 4 Remove roof unit Mounting se T ty M 2 2 Stand alone units The VSD must be mounted in a vertical position against a flat surface Use the template delivered together with the VSD to mark out the position of the fixing holes Fig 6 Variable speed drive mounting models 0003 to 1500 2 2 1 Cooling Fig 6 shows the minimum free space required around the VSD for the models 0003 to 1500 in order to guar antee adequate cooling Because the fans blow the air from the bottom to the top it is advisable not to position an air inlet immediately above an air outlet The following minimum separation between two varia ble speed drives or a VSD and a non dissipating wall must be maintained Valid if free space on opposite side Table 4 Mounting and cooling A 0003 0026 0090 pi Lt 0018 0046 0250 cabinet rapid b 200 200 200 0 side by side mm C 0 0 0 0 d 0 0 0 0 V33 wall a 100 100 100 100 wall one b 100 100 100 0 side c 0 0 0 0 mm d 0 0 0 0 NOTE When a 0300 to 1500 model is placed between two walls a minimum distance at each side of 200 mm must be maintained 10 Mounting 2 2 2 Mounting schemes 1285 248 2 1285 37 ees K NI 13 2x 512
173. etting the comparator output This function gives a clear dif ference in switching levels which lets the process adapt until a certain action is started With such a hys teresis even an instable analogue signal can be moni tored without getting a nervous comparator signal Another function is to get a clear indication that a cer tain situation has occurred the comparator can latch by set Level LO to a higher value than Level HI There are 2 digital comparators that compare any avail able digital signal The output signals of these comparators can be logi cally tied together to yield a logical output signal All the output signals can be programmed to the digital or relay outputs or used as a source for the virtual con nections 560 Analogue Comparator 1 Value 611 Selection of the analogue value for Analogue Compara tor 1 CA1 Analogue comparator 1 compares the selectable ana logue value in menu 611 with the constant Level HI in menu 612 and constant Level LO in menu 613 When the value exceeds the upper limit level high the output signal CA1 becomes high and A1 low see Fig 94 When the value then decreases below the lower limit the output signal CA1 becomes low and A1 high The output signal can be programmed as a virtual con nection source and to the digital or relay outputs 124 Functional Description Analogue value Menu 611 Signal CAL Adjustable Level HI M
174. f old electrical and electronic equipment This information is applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems This symbol on the product or on its packaging indi cates that this product shall be treated according to the WEEE Directive It must be taken to the applicable col lection point for the recycling of electrical and elec tronic equipment By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly you will help prevent potentially negative consequences for the environment and human health which could otherwise be caused by inappropriate waste handling of this product The recycling of materi als will help to conserve natural resources For more detailed information about recycling this product please contact the local distributor of the product Introduction 7 1 6 Glossary 1 6 1 Abbreviations and symbols 1 6 2 Definitions In this manual the following definitions for current torque and frequency are used In this manual the following abbreviations are used Table3 Definitions Table2 Abbreviations Name Description Quantity Abbreviation NR lin Nominal input current of VSD Arms symbol vesruuon INOM Nominal output current of VSD ARMS DSP Digital signals processor IMOT Nominal motor current Arms VSD Variable speed drive PNoM Nominal power of VSD kW CP Control panel the programming and
175. ff On Off Jog Ref Off On On Off Preset Ref 34 Main Features Table 18 Reference priority Off Off On Motor pot commands 7 1 6 Preset references The VSD is able to select fixed speeds via the control of digital inputs This can be used for situations where the required motor speed needs to be adapted to fixed val ues according to certain process conditions Up to 7 preset references can be set for each parameter set which can be selected via all digital inputs that are set to Preset Ctrl1 Preset Ctrl2 or Preset Ctrl3 The amount digital inputs used that are set to Preset Ctrl deter mines the number of Preset References available using 1 input gives 2 speeds using 2 inputs gives 4 speeds and using 3 inputs gives 8 speeds Example The use of four fixed speeds at 50 100 300 800 rpm requires the following settings Set Digln 5 as first selection input set 525 to Pre set Ctrl1 Set Digln 6 as second selection input set 526 to Preset Ctrl2 Set menu 341 Min Speed to 50 rpm Set menu 362 Preset Ref 1 to 100 rpm Set menu 363 Preset Ref 2 to 300 rpm Set menu 364 Preset Ref 3 to 800 rpm With these settings the VSD switched on and a RUN command given the speed will be 50 rpm when both Digln 5 and Digln 6 are low e 100 rpm when Digln 5 is high and Digln 6 is low e 300 rpm when Digln 5 is low and Digln 6 is high 800 rpm when both Di
176. following signals can be inverted IA1 A2 D1 D2 or LZ or LY The following logical operators are available OR operator amp AND operator EXOR operator Expressions according to the following truth table can be made Input Result A B amp AND OR EXOR 0 O0 O0 O0 O0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 The output signal can be programmed to the digital or relay outputs or used as a Virtual Connection Source 560 620 LOGIC Y Stp CA1 amp A2 amp CD1 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 31035 Function is identical to digital comparator 1 618 CD 2 StpFEA DigIn 1 Default Digln 1 Selection Same selections as for DigOut 1 541 Profibus slot index 121 179 Fieldbus format Long Modbus format Text The expression must be programmed by means of the menus 621 to 625 128 Functional Description Example Broken belt detection for Logic Y This example describes the programming for a so called broken belt detection for fan applications The comparator CA1 is set for frequency 10Hz The comparator A2 is set for load 2096 The comparator CD1 is set for Run The 3 comparators are all AND ed given the broken belt detection In menus 621 625 expression entered for Logic Y is visible Set menu 621 to CA1 Set menu 622 to amp Set menu 623 to A2 Set menu
177. g 241 Select Set A 242 Copy Set A gt B 243 Default gt Set A 244 Copy to CP No Copy 245 Load from CP No Copy 250 Autoreset 251 No of Trips 0 252 Overtemp Off 253 Overvolt D Off 254 Overvolt G off 255 Overvolt off 256 Motor Lost off 257 Locked Rotor off 258 Power Fault off 259 Undervoltage off 25A Motor t Off 25B Motor I2t TT rip 25C PT100 Off 25D PT100 TT rip 25E PTC Off 25F PTC TT Trip 25G Ext Trip Off 25H Ext Trip TT rip 25l Com Error off 25 Com Error TT Trip 25K Min Alarm Off 25L Min Alarm TT Trip 25M _ Max Alarm Off 25N Max Alarm TT Trip 250 Over curr F Off 25P Pump Off 25Q Over speed Off 25R Ext Mot Temp Off 25S Ext Mot TT Trip 25T LC Level Off 25U LC Level TT Trip 260 Serial Com 261 Com Type RS232 485 262 RS232 485 2621 Baudrate 9600 2622 Address 1 263 Fieldbus 2631 Address 62 2632 PrData Mode Basic 2633 Read Write RW 2634 AddPrValue 0 264 Comm Fault 2641 ComFit Mode Off 2642 ComFit Time 0 5s 265 Ethernet 2651 IP Address 0 0 0 0 2652 MAC Address 000000000000 2653 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 2654 Gateway 0 0 0 0 2655 DHCP Off 266 FB Signal 2661 FB Signal 1 2662 FB Signal 2 2663 FB Signal 3 2664 FB Signal 4 2665 FB Signal 5 2666 FB Signal 6 2667 FB Signal 7 2668 FB Signal 8 2669 FB Signal 9 Menu List 171 DEFAULT CUSTOM
178. g by increasing the internal electrical losses in the motor 33G Vector Brake StpFEA Off Default Off Off 0 Vector brake switched off VSD brakes nor mal with voltage limit on the DC link Maximum VSD current lc is available for On 1 i braking Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43116 Profibus slot index 169 20 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt 11 3 5 Speed 340 Menu with all parameters for settings regarding to speeds such as Min Max speeds Jog speeds Skip speeds Minimum Speed 341 Sets the minimum speed The minimum speed will operate as an absolute lower limit Used to ensure the motor does not run below a certain speed and to main tain a certain performance 341 Min Speed StpfN Orpm Default O rpm Range O Max Speed Dependent on Set View ref 310 NOTE A lower speed value than the set minimum speed can be shown in the display due to motor slip Stop Sleep when less than Minimum Speed 342 With this function it is possible to put the VSD in sleep mode when it is running at minimum speed for the length of time set due to process value feedback or a reference value that corresponds to a speed lower than the min speed set The VSD will go into sleep mode after programmed time When the reference signal or process value feedback raises the required speed value above the min speed value
179. ge Cooling option 2 6 Module number if parallel power units size 300 1500 A 12 3 Maintenance The variable speed drive is designed not to require any servicing or maintenance There are however some things which must be checked regularly All variable speed drives have built in fan which is speed controlled using heatsink temperature feedback This means that the fans are only running if the VSD is running and loaded The design of the heatsinks is such that the fan does not blow the cooling air through the interior of the VSD but only across the outer sur face of the heatsink However running fans will always attract dust Depending on the environment the fan and the heatsink will collect dust Check this and clean the heatsink and the fans when necessary NOTE Only valid for VSD types with Liquid E Jh r PF DC Err DC link error and mains supply fault ce Check t ses dnd line connections PF HCB Err Error in controlled rectifier module HCB Check mains supply voltage PF REE Mains Supply fault Check fuses and line connections Low liquid cooling level in external reservoir Check liquid cooling External input DigIn 1 8 active Ln TT LC Level active low function on the input Check the equipment and wiring that initiates the external input Check the programming of the digital inputs Digln 1 8 If variable speed drives are built into cabinets also check and clean the dust filters of
180. ged during run mode Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43041 Profibus slot index 168 200 Long Fieldbus format 4 04 V Modbus format EInt Motor Frequency 222 Set the nominal motor frequency 222 Motor Freq 8 StpEAMI 50Hz Default 50 Hz Range 24 300 Hz Resolution 1Hz Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43042 Profibus slot index 168 201 NOTE The default settings are for a standard 4 pole motor according to the nominal power of the VSD Fieldbus format Long 1 1 Hz Modbus format Elnt NOTE Parameter set cannot be changed during run if the sets is set for different motors NOTE Motor Data in the different sets M1 to M4 can be revert to default setting in menu 243 Default gt Set WARNING Enter the correct motor data to AN prevent dangerous situations and assure correct control Motor Voltage 221 Set the nominal motor voltage 221 Motor Volts 8 scopywi 400V Motor Power 223 Set the nominal motor power 223 Motor Power 6 scopyMi Pyom kW Default PuowVSD Range 1W 12096 x PNoM Resolution 3 significant digits NOTE The Motor Power value will always be stored as a 3 digit value in W up to 999 W and in kW for all higher powers Communication information 400 V for JNVX 40 and 48 Default 500 V f
181. ging load Direct torque control and vector brake gradually reduce speed to zero before mechanical brake is activated 213 33E 33F 33G Operator starts braking long before end position to System automatically stops crane at end posi s Neb A2 3AA avoid jerks Valuable time is lost tion Operator can safely drive at full speed 6 1 2 Crushers Challenge TECO V33 solution Menu Hizhistart currents reauiretarserfuses and cables Direct torque control reduces start current Same g q 8 fuses as those for the motor or smaller genera 331 338 351 or for mobile crushers larger diesel generators ton Difficult to start with heavy load Possible to boost torque at start to overcome ini 351 353 tial torque peak Material that could cause damage gets into the Load Curve Protection quickly detects deviation rx 411 4109 crusher Warning is sent or safety stop activated Process inefficiency due to e g broken feeder or Load Curve Protection quickly detects deviation worn jaw Wasted energy mechanical stress and from normal load Warning is sent or safety stop 411 41B 41C1 41C9 risk of process failure activated Applications 31 6 1 3 Mills Challenge TECO V33 solution Menu Direct torque control reduces start current Same fuses can be used as those required for the 331 338 350 motor High start currents require larger fuses and cables Cause stress on equip
182. gits it will be stored as 1000 In the TECO floating point format F 1 one 16 bit word is used to represent large or very small numbers with 3 significant digits If data is read or written as a fixed point i e no deci mals number between 0 32767 the TECO 15 bit fixed point format F O may be used F Format 1 TECO floating point format 0715 bit TECO 15 bit fixed point format The matrix below describes the contents of the 16 bit word for the two different Elnt formats B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO F 1 e3 e2 el e0 mlO m9 m8 m7 m6 m5 m4 m3 m2 ml m0 F 0 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 BO Example of TECO floating point format e3 e0 4 bit signed exponent 8 7 binary 1000 0111 ml0 mO 11 bit signed mantissa 1024 41023 binary 10000000000 01111111111 A signed number should be represented as a two com plement binary number like below 48 Serial communication Value Binary 8 1000 7 1001 2 11 10 Cee Ul GA L 0 0000 1 0001 2 0010 6 0110 7 0111 The value represented by the Elnt floating point format is m 10 To convert a value from the Elnt floating point format to a floating point value use the formula above To convert a floating point value to the Elnt floating point format see the code float to eint below Example The number 1 23 would be represented by this in Elnt F EEEE MMMMMMMMMM 1 1110 00001111011 F 1 Eint E 2 1
183. gln 5 and Digln 6 are high 7 2 Remote control functions Operation of the Run Stop Enable Reset functions As default all the run stop reset related commands are programmed for remote operation via the inputs on the terminal strip terminals 1 22 on the control board With the function Run Stp Ctrl 215 and Reset Control 216 this can be selected for keyboard or serial com munication control NOTE The examples in this paragraph do not cover all possibilities Only the most relevant combinations are given The starting point is always the default setting factory of the VSD Default settings of the Run Stop Enable Reset functions The default settings are shown in Fig 38 In this exam ple the VSD is started and stopped with Digln 2 and a reset after trip can be given with Digln 8 co 0 o ce amp om fX RunR Reset lt 22 24V CTT TT Fig 38 Default setting Run Reset commands The inputs are default set for level control The rotation is determined by the setting of the digital inputs Enable and Stop functions Both functions can be used separately or simultane ously The choice of which function is to be used depends on the application and the control mode of the inputs Level Edge 21A NOTE In Edge mode at least one digital input must be programmed to stop because the Run commands are otherwise only able to start the VSD Enable Input must be activ
184. h if the current is zero If this is not done the VSD can trip as a result of current peaks Installation 17 3 3 Connect motor and mains cables for 0090 to 1500 VSD JNVX48 0090 to 0250 and JNVX69 0090 to 0175 To simplify the connection of thick motor and mains cables to the VSD model JNVX48 0090 to 0250 and JNVX69 0090 to 0175 the cable interface plate can be removed Fig 25 Connecting motor and mains cables 1 Remove the cable interface plate from the VSD housing 2 Putthe cables through the glands Strip the cable according to Table 8 4 Connect the stripped cables to the respective mains motor terminal 5 Fix the clamps on appropriate place and tighten the cable in the clamp with good electrical contact to the cable screen 6 Put the cable interface plate in place and secure with the fixing screws w VSD model 0300 to 1500 Fig 26 Connecting motor and mains cables VSD models 0300 to 1500 are supplied with Klockner Moeller K3x240 4 power clamps For all type of wires to be connected the stripping length should be 32 mm 18 Installation 3 4 Cable specifications 3 5 2 Tightening torque for mains and motor cables Table9 Model JNVX48 52 0003 to 0046 Table 7 Cable specifi
185. h is related to the process reference i e goes above 7 1 m See Fig 76 711 Process Value Activate Wake up 987 310 Process Ref 712 Speed 386 Stop Sleep 1 341 Min Speed Fig 76 PID Stophsleep with inverted PID PID Steady State Test 388 In application situations where the feedback can become independent of the motor speed this PID Steady Test function can be used to overrule the PID operation and force the VSD to go in sleep mode i e the VSD automatically reduces the output speed while at the same time ensures the process value Example pressure controlled pump systems with low no flow operation and where the process pressure has become independent of the pump speed e g due to slowly closed valves By going into Sleep mode heating of the pump and motor will be avoided and no energy is spilled PID Steady state test delay NOTE It is important that the system has reached a stable situation before the Steady State Test is initiated 388 PID Stdy Tst StpFN Off Default Off Range Off 0 01 3600 s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43373 Profibus slot index 170 22 Fieldbus format Long 120 01 s Modbus format EInt PID Steady State Margin 389 PID steady state margin defines a margin band around the reference that defines steady state operation During the steady state test the PID operation i
186. he comparator CA1 output stays high mode RUN The reference signal passes the Level LO value from 6 above negative edge the comparator CA1 out put STOP Analogue Comparator 1 Level High Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43402 Profibus slot index 170 51 Long 1 1 W 0 1 A 0 1 V 0 1 Hz 0 1 C 1 kWh 1H 1 1 rom or 0 001 via process value Fieldbus format Modbus format Elnt Example This example describes the normal use of the constant level high and low Menu Function Setting 343 Max Speed 1500 611 CA1 Value Speed 612 CA1 Level HI 300 rpm 613 CA1 Level LO 200 rpm 561 VC1 Dest Timer 1 562 VC1 Source CA1 612 Selects the analogue comparator constant high level according to the selected value in menu 611 MAX The default value is 300 speed 343 612 CA1 Level HI ab i CA1 Level HI 612 StpEA 300rpmp Z4 Ni A vu Hysteresis 200 nz seelsSdLX gAItIbEr e pam Default 300 rpm CA1 Level LO 613 Range Enter a value for the high level Mode Min Max Decimals 1 1 1 l I 1 t Process 0 3 b og EO Ww a a Output 1 ot 1 1 Speed rpm 0 Max speed 0 CA1 3 o NM High Torque 0 Max torque O i i Shaft Power kW 0 Motor Px4 0 Low EI Power kW 0 Motor P x4 O Current A 0 Motor 1 x4 1 Output volt V O0 1000 1 F
187. hines EN 60204 1 Part i General requirements H Machine Directive Manufacturer s certificate acc to Appendix IIB Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems EN IEC 61800 3 2004 Part 3 EMC requirements and specific test methods EMC Directive Declaration of Conformity and CE marking All Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 5 1 EN IEC 61800 5 1 Ed Safety requirements Electrical thermal and energy 2 0 Low Voltage Directive Declaration of Conformity and CE marking Classification of environmental conditions Air quality chemical vapours unit in operation Chemical gases 3C1 Solid particles 3S2 IEC 60721 3 3 Optional with coated boards Unit in operation Chemical gases Class 3C2 Solid particles 3S2 UL508C UL Safety standard for Power Conversion Equipment UL Safety standard for Power Conversion Equipment power conversion equip USA 290 Aonly ment UL and UL UL 840 Insulation coordination including clearances and creepage distances for electri cal equipment Russian GOST R For all sizes 1 5 Dismantling and scrapping The enclosures of the drives are made from recyclable material as aluminium iron and plastic Each drive con tains a number of components demanding special treatment for example electrolytic capacitors The cir cuit boards contain small amounts of tin and lead Any local or national regulations in force for the disposal and recycling of these materials must be complied with 1 5 1 Disposal o
188. hysical minimum value is scaled to selected process unit The default scaling is dependent of the selected function of AnIn1 511 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43541 Profibus slot index 170 190 Long Speed 1 71 rpm Torque 1 196 Process val 120 001 Fieldbus format Modbus format Elnt Anln1 Function Max 5136 With AnIn1 Function Max the physical maximum value is scaled to selected process unit The default scaling is Table 25 shows corresponding values for the min and max selections depending on the function of the ana logue input 511 Table 25 Anin Function Min Max Speed Min Speed 341 Max Speed 343 Torque 0 Max Torque 351 Process Ref Process Min 324 Process Max 325 Process Value Process Min 324 Process Max 325 Communication information User defined 2 5134 AnIn1 FcMin dependent of the selected function of AnIn1 511 See Beta Min 5136 AnIn1 FcMax Min 0 Min value StpFA Max Max 1 Max value Default Max user 2 Define user value in menu 5135 Min 0 Min value defined Max Max value Define user value in menu 5137 Communication information Modbus Instance no Fieldbus format DeviceNet no Uer Profibus slot index 169 111 Long Speed Torque 1 71 rpm or 96 Other 1 0 001 Modbus format Elnt Anln1 Function Value Max 5137
189. ig 96 Frequency Hz 0 400 1 DC voltage V 0 1250 1 No Description i o Heatsink temp C 0 100 1 The reference signal passes the Level LO value from PT 100 1 2 3 C 100 300 4 1 below positive edge the comparator CA1 does not Energy kWh 0 1000000 0 change output stays low Run time h 0 65535 0 The reference signal passes the Level HI value from 2 below positive edge the comparator CA1 output is Mains time h 0 65535 0 set high Anin 1 496 0 100 0 126 Functional Description No Description The reference signal passes the Level HI value from 3 above negative edge the comparator CA1 does not change output stays high The reference signal passes the Level LO value from 4 above negative edge the comparator CA1 is reset output is set low The reference signal passes the Level LO value from 5 below positive edge the comparator CA1 does not change output stays low The reference signal passes the Level HI value from 6 below positive edge the comparator CA1 output is set high The reference signal passes the Level HI value from 7 above negative edge the comparator CA1 does not change output stays high The reference signal passes the Level LO value from 8 above negative edge the comparator CA1 is reset output is set low Analogue Comparator 1 Level Low 613 Selects the analogue comparator constant low level according to the selected value in men
190. ill the unit give an alarm to inform the operator that attention is required For all trip functions that can be activated by the user you can select to control the motor down to zero speed according to set deceleration ramp to avoid water ham mer Also see section 12 2 page 146 Autoreset example In an application it is known that the main supply volt age sometimes disappears for a very short time a so called dip That will cause the VSD to trip an Under voltage alarm Using the Autoreset function this trip will be acknowledged automatically Enable the Autoreset function by making the reset input continuously high Activate the Autoreset function in the menu 251 Number of trips Select in menus 252 to 25N the Trip condition that are allowed to be automatically reset by the Autoreset function after the set delay time has expired 66 Functional Description Number of Trips 251 Any number set above O activates the Autoreset This means that after a trip the VSD will restart automati cally according to the number of attempts selected No restart attempts will take place unless all conditions are normal If the Autoreset counter not visible contains more trips than the selected number of attempts the Autoreset cycle will be interrupted No Autoreset will then take place If there are no trips for more than 10 minutes the Autoreset counter decreases by one If the maximum number of trips
191. in menu 322 Set reference value If the function Reference Control 214 is set to Ref Control Keyboard the reference value can be set in menu Set View Reference 310 as a normal parameter or as a motor potentiometer with the and keys on the control panel depending on the selection of Key board Reference Mode in menu 369 The ramp times used for setting the reference value with the Normal function selected in menu 369 are according to the set Acc Time 331 and Dec Time 332 The ramp times used for setting the reference value with the Mot Pot function selected in 369 are according to the set Acc MotPot 333 and Dec MotPot 334 Menu 310 displays on line the actual reference value according to the Mode Settings in Table 23 310 Set View ref Stp Orpm Default Orpm Process Source 321 and Process Unit Dependent on 322 Speed mode O max speed 343 Torque mode O max torque 351 Other modes Min according to menu 324 max accord ing to menu 325 Functional Description 75 Communication information 321 Proc Source Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 42991 SCpEA Speed Profibus slot index 168 150 Default Speed Fieldbus format Long F Anln 0 Function of analogue input E g via PID control 330 Modbus format EInt Speed 1 Speed as process reference 2 NOTE The actual value in menu 310
192. in this menu will perform a soft reset re boot of the Fieldbus module RS232 485 262 Press Enter to set up the parameters for RS232 485 Modbus RTU communication 262 RS232 485 Stp Baud rate 2621 Set the baud rate for the communication NOTE This baud rate is only used for the isolated RS232 485 option 2621 Baudrate StpEN 9600 Default 9600 2400 0 4800 1 9600 2 Selected baud rate 19200 3 38400 4 Address 2622 Enter the unit address for the VSD NOTE This address is only used for the isolated RS232 485 option 2622 Address StpfN 1 Default 1 Selection 1 247 Fieldbus 263 Press Enter to set up the parameters for fieldbus com munication 263 Fieldbus StpfN Address 2631 Enter the unit address of the VSD 2631 Address StpfN 62 Default 62 Range Profibus 0 126 DeviceNet 0 63 Node address valid for Profibus and DeviceNet Process Data Mode 2632 Enter the mode of process data cyclic data For fur ther information see the Fieldbus option manual 2632 PrData Mode StpFA Basic Default Basic None O Control status information is not used Basic 4 4 byte process data control status informa4 tion is used 4 byte process data same as Basic set Extended 8 ting additional proprietary protocol for advanced users is used Read Write 2633 S
193. index 168 182 Fieldbus format Ulnt A gt B means that th ntent of parameter set A is cop eans that the content o para ete p Modbus format Ulnt ied into parameter set B NOTE Trip log hour counter and other VIEW ONLY menus are not regarded as settings and will be unaffected NOTE If Factory is selected the message Sure is displayed Press the key to display Yes and then Enter to confirm NOTE The parameters in menu 220 Motor data are not affected by loading defaults when restoring parameter sets A D Functional Description 65 Copy All Settings to Control Panel 244 All the settings can be copied into the control panel including the motor data Start commands will be ignored during copying 244 Copy to CP 8 StpFA No Copy Default No Copy NoCopy O Nothing will be copied Copy 1 Copy all settings Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43024 Profibus slot index 168 183 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format UInt NOTE The actual value of menu 310 will not be copied into control panel memory set Load Settings from Control Panel 245 This function can load all four parameter sets from the control panel to the VSD Parameter sets from the source VSD are copied to all parameter sets in the tar get VSD i e Ato A B to B C to C and D to D Start commands will be ignored during loa
194. index no modulo the remainder of the division above 136 calculated as 31502 1 123x255 136 11 8 3 Reset Trip Log 8A0 Resets the content of the 10 trip memories 8A0 Reset Trip Stp No Default No No 0 Yes 1 Functional Description 141 Communication information Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 8 Profibus slot index 0 7 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt NOTE After the reset the setting goes automatically back to NO The message OK is displayed for 2 sec 11 9 System Data 900 Main menu for viewing all the VSD system data 11 9 1 VSD Data 920 VSD Type 921 Shows the VSD type according to the type number The options are indicated on the type plate of the VSD NOTE If the control board is not configured then type type shown is JNVX40 XXX 921 V33 JNVX48 0046 Stp Example of type Communication information Examples Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 31037 Profibus slot index 121 181 Fieldbus format Long Modbus format Text JNVX48 0046VSD series suited for 380 480 volt mains supply and a rated output current of 46 A Software 922 Shows the software version number of the VSD Fig 107 gives an example of the version number 922 Software V 4 20 Stp Fig 107 Example of software version Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no
195. information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43313 Profibus slot index 169 217 Fieldbus format Long 171 rpm Modbus format EInt With this set up the process data is scaled and linked to known values which results in an accurate control F Value PrMax 1500 328 F Value Process Max 328 This function is used for scaling if no sensor is used It offers you the possibility of increasing the process accuracy by scaling the process values The process values are scaled by linking them to known data in the VSD With F Value Proc Max the precise value at which the entered Process Max 525 is valid can be entered NOTE If Speed Torque or Frequency is chosen in menu 321 Proc Source menus 322 328 are hidden 328 F Val PrMax StpFAX Max Default Max Min 1 Min Max 2 Max 0 000 10000 0 10000 0 000 10000 Linear F Value PrMin 150 327 10 Process Min 324 Bottles s 100 Process Max 325 Fig 61 Functional Description 79 11 3 3 Start Stop settings 330 Submenu with all the functions for acceleration decel eration starting stopping etc Acceleration Time 331 The acceleration time is defined as the time it takes for the motor to accelerate from O rpm to nominal motor speed NOTE If the Acc Time is too short the motor is accelerated according to the Torque Limit The actual Accelerat
196. ion 1 561 and 562 Communication information for virtual connections 2 8 Destination 43283 43285 43287 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43289 43291 43293 43295 169 187 189 191 Profibus slot index 193 195 197 199 Fieldbus format UInt Modbus format UInt Communication information for virtual connections 2 8 Source 43284 43286 43288 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43290 43292 43294 43296 169 188 190 192 Profibus slot index 194 196 198 200 Fieldbus format UInt Modbus format UInt 11 6 Logical Functions and Timers 600 With the Comparators Logic Functions and Timers conditional signals can be programmed for control or signalling features This gives you the ability to compare different signals and values in order to generate moni toring controlling features 11 6 1 Comparators 610 The comparators available make it possible to monitor different internal signals and values and visualize via digital output or a contact when a specific value or sta tus is reached or established There are 2 analogue comparators that compare any available analogue value including the analogue refer ence inputs with two adjustable constants For the two analogue comparators two different con stants are available Level HI and Level LO With these two levels it is possible to create a clear hysteresis for the analogue comparator between setting and res
197. ion Time may then be longer than the value set rpm Nom Speed Acc Time 331 Dec Time 332 NG 06 F11 Fig 63 Acceleration and deceleration times Deceleration Time 332 331 Acc Time The deceleration time is defined as the time it takes for StpFA 10 0s the motor to decelerate from nominal motor speed to O rpm Default 10 0s Range 0 3600s 332 Dec Time Stp 10 0s Communication information Default 10 0 s Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43101 Range 0 3600 s Profibus slot index 169 5 Fieldbus format Long 1 0 01 s Communication information Modbus format Elnt Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43102 Fig 62 shows the relationship between nominal motor Profibus slot index 169 6 speed max speed and the acceleration time The same Fieldbus format Long 1 0 01 s is valid for the deceleration time Modbus format Elnt rpm Nominal Speed 10096 flr Doc ete tiere eects MEE En Ee Max Speed 80 nyor eee cee eeeeeececeeeeeeceee eee 06 F12 8s 10s t Fig 62 Acceleration time and maximum speed Fig 63 shows the settings of the acceleration and deceleration times with respect to the nominal motor speed NOTE If the Dec Time is too short and the generator energy cannot be dissipated in a brake resistor the motor is decelerated according to the overvoltage limit The actual deceler
198. ion is finished and you can press the external start button to start the motor When the motor is running the main connections are OK 28 Getting Started 5 4 Local control Manual control via the control panel can be used to carry out a test run Use a 400 V motor and the control panel 5 4 1 Switch on the mains Close the door to the VSD Once the mains is switched on the VSD is started and the internal fan will run for 5 seconds 5 4 2 Select manual control Menu 100 Preferred View is displayed when started 1 Press 2 to display menu 200 Main Setup Press i to display menu 210 Operation Press amp to display menu 211 Language Press 2 to display menu 214 Reference Control oO A N Select Keyboard using the key and press i to confirm Oo Press z to get to menu 215 Run Stop Control 7 Select Keyboard using the key and press zi to confirm 8 Press to get to previous menu level and then 2 to display menu 220 Motor Data 5 4 3 Set the Motor Data Enter correct motor data for the connected motor 9 Press i to display menu 221 10 Change the value using the and keys Con firm with zi 11 Press 2 to display menu 222 12 Repeat step 9 and 10 until all motor data is entered 13 Press twice and then s to display menu 100 Preferred View 5 4 4 Enter a Reference Value Enter a reference value 14 Press 2 until menu 300 Process is disp
199. isplayed 9 5 Editing values in a menu Most values in the second row in a menu can be changed in two different ways Enumerated values like the baud rate can only be changed with alternative 1 2621 Baudrate Stp 38400 Alternative 1 When you press the or keys to change a value the cursor is blinking to the left in the display and the value is increased or decreased when you press the appropri ate key If you keep the or keys pressed the value will increase or decrease continuously When you keep the key pressed the change speed will increase The Toggle key is used to change the sign of the entered 44 Operation via the Control Panel value The sign of the value will also change when zero is passed Press Enter to confirm the value 331 Acc Time Str 2 00s Blinking Alternative 2 Press the or key to enter edit mode Then press the Prev or Next key to move the cursor to the right most position of the value that should be changed The cur sor will make the selected character blink Move the cursor using the Prev or Next keys When you press the or keys the character at the cursor position will increase or decrease This alternative is suitable when you want to make large changes i e from 2 s to 400 s To change the sign of the value press the toggle key This makes it possible to enter negative values Example When you press Next the 4 will blink 331 Acc Time StpFA 4 00s Blinking Pres
200. ition speed is best set by trial and error In general e fthe additional pump has slow start stop dynam ics then a higher transition speed should be used e fthe additional pump has fast start stop dynam ics then a lower transition speed should be used 39E TransS Start Stp RN 60 Default 60 Range 0 100 of total min speed to max speed Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43174 Profibus slot index 169 78 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 Modbus format EInt Example Max Speed 1500 rpm Min Speed 200 rpm TransS Start 6096 When an additional pump is needed the speed will be controlled down to min speed 60 x 1500 rpm 200 rpm 200 rpm 780 rpm 980 rpm When this speed is reached the additional pump with the lowest run time hours will be switched on 98 Functional Description Switch on Speed procedure starts Additional pump Actual Trans L 2 X Pal Master pump Mi p ta tf a Le NE D PER eee Flow Pressure A Actual start command of next pump RELAY NG_50 PC 16_1 Fig 82 Transition speed start Transition Speed Stop 39G The transition speed stop is used to minimize a flow pressure overshoot when shutting down an additional pump The setting depends on the dynamics of both the master drive and the additional drives In general e fthe a
201. l StpFEA Orpm 100 Default 10096 Range 0 40096 of max torque 106 Functional Description Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no Profibus slot index 4333696 43337 rpm 4333896 43339 rpm 4334096 43341 rpm 43342 43343 rpm 43344 43345 rpm 43346 43347 rpm 43348 43349 rpm 43350 43351 rpm 43352 43353 rpm 169 240 169 242 169 244 169 246 169 248 169 250 169 252 169 254 170 1 Fieldbus format Long 11 4 2 Process Protection 420 Submenu with settings regarding protection functions for the VSD and the motor Low Voltage Override 421 If a dip in the mains supply occurs and the low voltage override function is enabled the VSD will automatically decrease the motor speed to keep control of the appli cation and prevent an under voltage trip until the input voltage rises again Therefore the rotating energy in the motor load is used to keep the DC link voltage level at the override level for as long as possible or until the motor comes to a standstill This is dependent on the inertia of the motor load combination and the load of the motor at the time the dip occurs see Fig 87 Modbus format Elnt NOTE The speed values depend on the Min and Max Speed values they are read only and cannot be changed 0 5 Speed OOO Measured load samples I Min max tolerance band Max alarm limit Min alarm limit
202. layed 15 Press i to display menu 310 Set View reference value 16 Use the and keys to enter for example 300 rpm We select a low value to check the rotation direction without damaging the application 5 4 5 Run the VSD Press the Q key on the control panel to run the motor forward If the motor is running the main connections are OK Getting Started 29 30 Getting Started 6 Applications will find application examples of the most common applications and solutions This chapter contains tables giving an overview of many different applications duties in which it is suitable to use variable speed drives from TECO Further on you 6 1 Application overview 6 1 1Cranes Challenge TECO V33 solution Menu Starting with heavy load is difficult and risky Can lead to jerks causing swinging load Direct torque control fast motor pre magnetiza tion and precise brake control gives instant yet soft start with heavy load 331 338 339 350 Jerky movements can cause load to be dropped jeopardizing safety of people and goods Deviation control immediately detects load change Signals to parallel safety system to acti vate mechanical brakes 3AB 3AC Crane is driven slowly when returning empty or with light load Valuable time is lost Speed can be increased by field weakening 343 3AA 3AD 713 Braking with heavy load is difficult and risky Can lead to jerks causing swin
203. ldbus format Long 1 1s Modbus format Elnt 68 Functional Description Motor I t 25A Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone When the time delay has elapsed the alarm will be reset if the function is active Communication information 25A Motor I t StpEN Off Default Off Off 0 Off 1 3600 1 3600 1 3600 s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43073 Profibus slot index 168 232 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 s Modbus format Elnt Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43078 Profibus slot index 168 237 Fieldbus format Long 1 1s Modbus format Elnt PT100 Trip Type 25D Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone When the time delay has elapsed the alarm will be reset if the function is active Motor I t Trip Type 25B Select the preferred way to react to a Motor It trip 25B Motor I t TT StpFA Trip Default Trip Trip 0 The motor will trip Deceleration 1 The motor will decelerate Communication information 25D PT100 TT StpEN Trip Default Trip Selection Same as menu 25B Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43079 Profibus slot index 168 238 Fieldbus format Uint Modbus format Ulnt PTC 25E Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone When the time delay has elapsed
204. les must be separated from motor and mains cables 24 Control Connections 4 5 2 Types of control signals Always make a distinction between the different types of signals Because the different types of signals can adversely affect each other use a separate cable for each type This is often more practical because for example the cable from a pressure sensor may be con nected directly to the variable speed drive We can distinguish between the following types of con trol signals Analogue inputs Voltage or current signals 0 10 V 0 4 20 mA nor mally used as control signals for speed torque and PID feedback signals Analogue outputs Voltage or current signals 0 10 V 0 4 20 mA which change slowly or only occasionally in value In general these are control or measurement signals Digital Voltage or current signals 0 10 V 0 24 V 0 4 20 mA which can have only two values high or low and only occasionally change in value Data Usually voltage signals 0 5 V 0 10 V which change rapidly and at a high frequency generally data signals such as RS232 RS485 Profibus etc Relay Relay contacts 0 250 VAC can switch highly inductive loads auxiliary relay lamp valve brake etc Signal Maximum wire size Tightening Cable type type torque Analogue Rigid cable Screened Dump 0 24 25 mm 7 igital Flexible cable ME asia Data 0 14 1 5 mm i Screened Cable with ferrule
205. load is held while the mechanical brake engages It is also used to get a firm stop when transmissions etc cause whiplash effects In other words it compensates for the time it takes to engage a mechanical brake StpEA Orpm Default O rpm Range 4x Sync Speed to 4x Sync 4xmotor sync speed 1500 rpm for 1470 Bepentor rpm motor 33E Brk Engage StpfN 0 00s Default 0 00 s Range 0 00 3 00 s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43114 Profibus slot index 169 18 Fieldbus format Long 1 0 01 s Modbus format Elnt Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43113 Profibus slot index 169 17 Fieldbus format Int 1 1 rom Modbus format Int 1 1 rom Wait Before Brake Time 33F The brake wait time is the time to keep brake open and to hold the load either in order to be able to speed up immediately or to stop and engage the brake 33F Brk Wait StpfN 0 00s Default 0 00 s Range 0 00 30 0 s 84 Functional Description Communication information Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43115 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43121 Profibus slot index 169 19 Profibus slot index 169 25 Fieldbus format Long 120 01 s Fieldbus format Int 171 rpm Modbus format EInt Modbus format Int 121 rpm Vector Brake 33G Brakin
206. mation Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43131 Profibus slot index 169 35 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Fig 73 MotPot function Preset Ref 1 362 to Preset Ref 7 368 Preset speeds have priority over the analogue inputs Preset speeds are activated by the digital inputs The digital inputs must be set to the function Pres Ref 1 Pres Ref 2 or Pres Ref 4 Depending on the number of digital inputs used up to 7 preset speeds can be activated per parameter set Using all the parameter sets up to 28 preset speeds are possible 362 Preset Ref 1 StpEX Orpm Default Speed O rpm Dependent on Process Source 321 and Process Unit 322 Speed mode O max speed 343 Torque mode O max torque 351 Min according to menu 324 max according Other modes to menu 325 Communication information 43132 43138 169 36 169 42 Fieldbus format Long Modbus format Elnt Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no Profibus slot index The same settings are valid for the menus 363 Preset Ref 2 with default 250 rom 364 Preset Ref 3 with default 500 rpm 365 Preset Ref 4 with default 750 rpm 366 Preset Ref 5 with default 1000 rpm 367 Preset Ref 6 with default 1250 rpm 368 Preset Ref 7 with default 1500 rpm a a Functional Description 89 The selection of the presets is as in Table 24 Table 24 Preset Preset Prese
207. ment and higher energy cost Possible to boost torque at start to overcome ini tial torque peak 351 353 Difficult to start with heavy load Material that could cause damage gets into the Load Curve Protection quickly detects deviation mill Warning is sent or safety stop activated ATIGI Process inefficiency due to broken or worn equip Load Curve Protection quickly detects deviation ment Energy wasted and risk of process failure Warning is sent or safety stop activated e UM 6 1 4 Mixers Challenge TECO V33 solution Menu Direct torque control reduces start current Same fuses can be used as those required for the 331 338 350 motor High start currents require larger fuses and cables Cause stress on equipment and higher energy cost Built in shaft power monitor determines when vis4 cosity is right 411 41B Difficult to determine when mixing process is ready Process inefficiency due to e g a damaged or bro ken blade Energy wasted and risk of process fail ure Load Curve Protection quickly detects deviation Warning is sent or safety stop activated ADT rte 32 Applications 7 Main Features This chapter contains descriptions of the main features of the VSD 7 1 Parameter sets Parameter sets are used if an application requires dif ferent settings for different modes For example a machine can be used for producing different products and thu
208. n 14 are used the master drive will be changed immediately if the feedback generates an Error NOTE This menu will NOT be active if less than 3 drives are selected Change Condition 394 This parameter determines the criteria for changing the master This menu only appears if Alternating MASTER operation is selected The elapsed run time of each drive is monitored The elapsed run time always deter mines which drive will be the new master drive Functional Description 95 Change Timer 395 When the time set here is elapsed the master drive will be changed This function is only active if Select Drive 393 All and Change Cond 394 Timer Both Upper Band 397 If the speed of the master drive comes into the upper band an additional drive will be added after a delay time that is set in start delay 399 395 Change Timer StpFA 50h Default 50h Range 1 3000 h Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43165 Profibus slot index 169 69 Fieldbus format Ulnt 121 h Modbus format Ulnt 1 1 h Drives on Change 396 If a master drive is changed according to the timer func tion Change Condition Timer Both 394 it is possi ble to leave additional pumps running during the change operation With this function the change opera tion will be as smooth as possible The maximum number to be programmed in this menu depends on the numbe
209. n Time 83M Mains Time Menu List 175 DEFAULT CUSTOM DEFAULT CUSTOM 83N Energy 865 Electrical Power 840 866 Current 841 Process Value 867 Output voltage 842 Speed 868 Frequency 843 Torque 869 DC Link voltage 844 Shaft Power 86A Heatsink Tmp 845 Electrical Power 86B PT100_1 2 3 846 Current 86C FI Status 847 Output voltage 86D Digln status 848 Frequency 86E DigOut status 849 DC Link voltage 86F Anin 12 84A Heatsink Tmp 86G AniIn34 84B PT100 1 2 3 86H AnOut 12 84C FI Status 86 10 Status B1 84D Digln status 86J IO Status B2 84E DigOut status 86K IO Status B3 84F Anln status 12 86L Run Time 84G Anin status 3 4 86M Mains Time 84H _ AnOut status 1 2 86N Energy 841 IO Status B1 870 84J IO Status B2 871 Process Value 84K IO Status B3 872 Speed 84L Run Time 873 Torque 84M Mains Time 874 Shaft Power 84N Energy 875 Electrical Power 850 876 Current 851 Process Value 877 Output voltage 852 Speed 878 Frequency 853 Torque 879 DC Link voltage 854 Shaft Power 87A Heatsink Tmpe 855 Electrical Power 87B PT100_1 2 3 856 Current 87C FI Status 857
210. n the Main Menu 100 Preferred View Displayed at power up It displays the actual process value as default Programmable for many other read outs 200 Main Setup Main settings to get the VSD operable The motor data settings are the most important Also option utility and settings 300 Process and Application Parameters Settings more relevant to the application such as Refer ence Speed torque limitations PID control settings etc 400 Shaft Power Monitor and Process Protection The monitor function enables the VSD to be used as a load monitor to protect machines and processes against mechanical overload and underload 500 _Inputs Outputs and Virtual Connections All settings for inputs and outputs are entered here 600 Logical Functions and Timers All settings for conditional signal are entered here 700 View Operation and Status Viewing all the operational data like frequency load power current etc 800 View Trip Log Viewing the last 10 trips in the trip memory 900 Service Information and VSD Data Electronic type label for viewing the software version and VSD type 9 4 Programming during operation Most of the parameters can be changed during opera tion without stopping the VSD Parameters that can not be changed are marked with a lock symbol in the dis play NOTE If you try to change a function during operation that only can be changed when the motor is stopped the message Stop First is d
211. nce signal 516A AnIn2 Enabl Digln set AnIn2 to be active when Digln3 is LOW 523 Digln3 Anln set Digln3 as input fot selection of Al reference Functional Description 109 Subtracting analogue inputs Example 2 Subtract two signals Signal on Anln1 8 V Signal on AnIn2 AV 511 AnIn1 Function Process Ref 512 AnIn1 Setup 0 10 V 5134 AnIn1 Function Min Min O rpm 5136 AnIn1 Function Max Max 1500 rpm 5138 AnIn1 Operation Add 514 AnIn2 Function Process Ref 515 AnIn2 Setup 0 10 V 5164 AnIn2 Function Min Min O rpm 5166 AnIn2 Function Max Max 1500 rpm 5168 AnIn2 Operation Sub Calculation Anlin1 8 0 10 0 x 1500 0 O 1200 rpm AnIn2 4 0 10 0 x 1500 0 O 600 rpm The actual process reference will be 1200 600 600 rpm Anln1 Setup 512 The analogue input setup is used to configure the ana logue input in accordance with the signal used that will be connected to the analogue input With this selection the input can be determined as current 4 20 mA or voltage 0 10 V controlled input Other selections are available for using a threshold live zero a bipolar input function or a user defined input range With a bipolar input refer ence signal it is possible to control the motor in two directions See Fig 88 NOTE The selection of voltage or current input is done with S1 When the switch is in voltage mode only the voltage me
212. nction on the input Check the programming of the digital inputs Digln 1 8 Check the equipment that initiates the External input DigIn 1 8 active external input Ext Mot lemp active low function on the input Check the programming of the digital inputs Digln 1 8 Max alarm level overload has been Check the load condition of the machine Mon MaxAlarm reached Check the monitor setting in section 11 6 page 124 Mon MinAlarm Min alarm level underload has been reached Check the load condition of the machine Check the monitor setting in section 11 6 page 124 Comm error PT100 Error on serial communication option Motor PT100 elements exceeds maximum level NOTE Only valid if option board PTC PT100 is used Check cables and connection of the serial communication Check all settings with regard to the serial communication Restart the equipment including the VSD Check on mechanical overload on the motor or the machinery bearings gearboxes chains belts etc Check the motor cooling system Self cooled motor at low speed too high load Set PT100 to OFF Troubleshooting Diagnoses and Maintenance 147 Table 31 Trip condition their possible causes and remedial action Trip condition Possible Cause Remedy CRANE board detecting deviation in motor operation Check encoder signals Deviation Check Deviation jumper on Crane option board NOTE
213. nctional Description 105 Min Alarm Response delay 4192 Sets the delay time between the first occurrence of min alarm condition and after when the alarm is given 4192 MinAlarmDel StpfN 0 1s Default O 1s Range 0 90 s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43333 Profibus slot index 169 237 Fieldbus format Long 170 1 s Modbus format EInt Autoset Alarm 41A The Autoset Alarm function can measure the nominal load that is used as reference for the alarm levels If the selected Load Type 415 is Basic it copies the load the motor is running with to the menu Normal Load 41B The motor must run on the speed that generates the load that needs to be recorded If the selected Load Type 415 is Load Curve it performs a test run and pop ulates the Load Curve 41C with the found load values to maximum speed WARNING When autoset does a test run the J motor and application machine will ramp up NOTE The motor must be running for the Autoset Alarm function to succeed A not running motor generates a Failed message 41A AutoSet Alrm StpEA No Default No No 0 Yes 1 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43334 Profibus slot index 169 238 Fieldbus format UInt Modbus format UInt The default set levels for the pre alarms are Max Alarm menu 4161 41
214. nd make them longer if necessary Check the dimensions of the brake resistor and the functionality of the Brake chopper if used Over volt Mains O ver volt M ains cut Too high DC Link voltage due to too high mains voltage Motor speed measurement exceeds maxi Check the main supply voltage Try to take away the interference cause or use other main supply lines Check encoder cables wiring and setup Over speed Check motor data setup 22x mum level Perform short ID run Make sure all three phases are properly connected Too low DC Link voltage and that the terminal screws are tightened Too low or no supply voltage Check that the mains supply voltage is within the limits Under voltage Mains voltage dip due to starting other of the VSD major power consuming machines on Try to use other mains supply lines if dip is caused by the same line other machinery Use the function low voltage override 421 Power Fault Overload condition in the DC link v run Check on bad motor cable connections Hard short circuit between phases or Check on bad earth cable connection phase to earth Check on water or moisture in the motor housing and Saturation of current measurement 1 circuitin cable connections Desat 8 Check that rating plate data of the motor is correctly Earth fault entered Desaturation of IGBTs Sese ovenoltagetins Peak voltage on DC link ge vip Power
215. ndition 541 DigOut 1 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43262 Profibus slot index 169 166 Fieldbus format UInt Modbus format Ulnt AnOut2 Advanced 536 Same functions and submenus as under AnOut1 Advanced 533 536 AnOut2 Advan StpEy Communication information 43263 43267 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43546 43556 169 167 169 171 Profibus slot index 170 195 170 205 StpEN Ready Default Ready Off 0 Output is not active and constantly low Output is made constantly high i e On 1 for checking circuits and trouble shooting Running The VSD output is active Run 2 produces current for the motor Stop 3 The VSD output is not active The output frequency 0 0 1Hz when OHz 4 Pn in Run condition Acc Dec 5 The speed is increasing or decreasing along the acc ramp dec ramp At Process 6 The output 7 Reference At Max spd 7 The frequency is limited by the Maxi mum Speed No Trip 8 No Trip condition active Trip A Trip condition is active AutoRst Trip 10 Autoreset trip condition active Limit 11 A Limit condition is active Warning 12 A Warning condition is active The VSD is ready for operation and to accept a start command This means R 1 cady 3 that the VSD is powered up and healthy T Tim 14 The torque is limited by the torque limit function The output current is higher than the motor nominal cu
216. nificant digits Process Ref Process reference Shaft power 0 1 2 3 Shaft Power 4 5 6 7 8 9 El Power Electrical power Current Current Output volt Output voltage Frequency Frequency DC Voltage DC voltage Heatsink Tmp 10 Heatsink temperature Table 22 3 Digit Resolution 0 01 9 99 0 01 10 0 99 9 0 1 100 999 1 1000 9990 10 10000 99900 100 Motor Temp 14 Motor temperature VSD Status 12 VSDstatus Run Time 13 Run Time Energy 14 Energy Mains Time 15 Mains time 11 1 Preferred View 100 This menu is displayed at every power up During opera tion the menu 100 will automatically be displayed when the keyboard is not operated for 5 minutes The automatic return function will be switched off when the Toggle and Stop key is pressed simultaneously As default it displays the actual speed and torque 100 Orpm StpFX 0 0Nm Menu 100 Preferred View displays the settings made in menu 110 1st line and 120 2nd line See Fig 56 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43001 Profibus slot index 168 160 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Functional Description 53 11 1 2 2nd Line 120 Sets the content of the lower row in the menu 100 Preferred View Same selection as in menu 110 120 2nd Line StpFA Torque Default Torque 11 2 Main Setup
217. nit 322 322 Proc Unit StpfN rpm Default rom off 0 No unit selection 1 Percent C 2 Degrees Centigrade F 3 Degrees Fahrenheit bar 4 bar Pa 5 Pascal Nm 6 Torque Hz 7 Frequency rpm 8 Revolutions per minute m3 h 9 Cubic meters per hour 76 Functional Description gal h 10 Gallons per hour ft3 h 11 Cubic feet per hour User 12 User defined unit Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43303 Profibus slot index 169 207 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt NOTE In case of conflicting setup between this Process Source 321 selection and drive mode 213 the software will automatically overrule the selection in menu 321 according to the following 213 Torque and 321 Speed internally 321 Torque will be used 213 Speed or V Hz and 321 Torque internally 321 Speed will be used User defined Unit 323 This menu is only displayed if User is se 322 The function enables the user to lected in menu define a unit with six symbols Use the Prev and Next key to move the cursor to required position Then use the and keys to scroll down the character list Confirm the character by moving the cursor to the next position by pressing the
218. no 43422 Profibus slot index 170 71 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format UInt Z Comp 2 633 Selects the second comparator for the logic Z function 633 Z Comp 2 StpEX A2 Default A2 Selection Same as menu 621 130 Functional Description Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43423 Profibus slot index 170 72 Fieldbus format UInt Modbus format Ulnt Z Operator 2 634 Selects the second operator for the logic Z function 634 Z Operator 2 StpEN amp Default amp Selection Same as menu 624 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43424 Profibus slot index 170 73 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Z Comp 3 635 Selects the third comparator for the logic Z function 635 Z Comp 3 StpFA CD1 Default CD1 Selection Same as menu 621 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43425 Profibus slot index 170 74 Fieldbus format UlInt Modbus format UInt 11 6 4 Timer1 640 The Timer functions can be used as a delay timer or as an interval with separate On and Off times alternate mode In delay mode the output signal TLQ becomes high if the set delay time is expired See Fig 98 lt lt gt gt Timer1 delay T1Q Fig 98 In alternate mode the
219. nt Max Pre Alarm 417 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43325 Profibus slot index 169 229 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Max Pre AlarmMargin 4171 With load type Basic 415 used the Max Pre Alarm Margin sets the band above the Normal Load 41B menu that does not generate a pre alarm With load type Load Curve 415 used the Max Pre Alarm Margin sets the band above the Load Curve 41C that does not generate a pre alarm The Max Pre Alarm Margin is a percentage of nominal motor torque 104 Functional Description 4171 MaxPreAlMar StpFA 10 Communication information Default 10 0 400 Range Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43328 Profibus slot index 169 232 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 Modbus format Elnt Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43327 Profibus slot index 169 231 Fieldbus format Long 1 0 1 Modbus format Elnt Max Pre Alarm delay 4172 Sets the delay time between the first occurrence of max pre alarm condition and after when the alarm is given 4172 MaxPreAlDel StpFA 0 1s Default O 1s Range 0 90s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43331 Profibus slot index 169 235 Fieldbus format Long 1 0 1s Modbus format Elnt Min Pre Alarm 418 Min Pre Alarm Response
220. nt Modbus format EInt Shaft power 714 Displays the actual shaft power 714 Shaft Power stp W Unit Ww Resolution 1W Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 31005 Output Voltage 717 Displays the actual output voltage 717 Output Volt Profibus slot index 121 149 Fieldbus format Long 1 1W Modbus format EInt Electrical Power 715 Displays the actual electrical output power 715 El Power Stp kW Unit kW Resolution 1W Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 31006 Stp V Unit V Resolution 1V Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 31008 Profibus slot index 121 152 Fieldbus format Long 120 1 V Modbus format EInt Frequency 718 Displays the actual output frequency 718 Frequency Stp Hz Unit Hz Resolution 0 1 Hz Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 31009 Profibus slot index 121 153 Fieldbus format Long 1 0 1 Hz Modbus format Elnt Profibus slot index 121 150 Fieldbus format Long 1 1W Modbus format Elnt Functional Description 135 DC Link Voltage 719 Displays the actual DC link voltage 719 DC Voltage Stp V Unit V Resolution 1V Communication information 11 7 2 Status 7
221. nu items are selectable With the switch in current mode only the current menu items are selectable 512 AnInl Setup 4 20mA StpEN 4 20 mA Default Dependenton Setting of switch S1 The current input has a fixed threshold Live Zero of 4 mA and controls the full range for the input signal See Fig 90 4 20mA 0 Normal full current scale configuration of the input that controls the full range for the input signal See Fig 89 0 20mA 1 The scale of the current controlled input that controls the full range for the input sig nal Can be defined by the advanced Anin Min and AnIn Max menus User mA 2 Sets the input for a bipolar current input User Bipol where the scale controls the range for the mA input signal Scale can be defined in advanced menu Anin Bipol Normal full voltage scale configuration of the input that controls the full range for the input signal See Fig 89 0 10V 4 The voltage input has a fixed threshold Live Zero of 2 V and controls the full range for the input signal See Fig 90 2 10V 5 The scale of the voltage controlled input that controls the full range for the input sig nal Can be defined by the advanced Anin Min and AnIn Max menus User V 6 Sets the input for a bipolar voltage input User Bipol where the scale controls the range for the V input signal Scale can be defined in advanced menu Anin Bipol
222. o 122 Relay 2 c nescius 122 Relay Susan Hans 122 Release speed 84 Remote control 35 Reset command 115 Reset control nip 55 Resolution eeeeesss 53 RFI mains filter 16 ROLAUUON e 56 RS232 485 iiu isses 73 RUN seed iet heces 42 Run command 42 Run Left command 115 Run Right command 115 Running motor sseesese 83 S Select Drive 94 95 Settle Time cesses 98 Setup menu sseesssssss 44 Menu structure 44 Signal ground 169 Single ended connection 25 SoftWare i e iieiea aeni 142 Speed aiina e e eea 134 Speed Mode iioc iride 54 SpiriStark dct oneri tesee 83 Standards esses 6 Start Delay 5 iere ees 97 Start Stop settings 80 Status indications 41 Stop categories 39 Stop command 115 Stop Delay succinic 97 Stripping lengths 19 Switches nsei esee cerdo cari 22 Switching in motor cables 17 T Terminal connections 22 Test RUD ied etes 60 MiMe occi ier et teo rei alan 95
223. o DeviceNet no 43307 This menu is not visible when speed frequency or 43308 torque is selected The function sets the ratio between 43309 the actual process value and the motor speed so that it 169 208 has an accurate process value when no feedback sig 169 209 nal is used See Fig 60 Profibus slot index ev is oe 326 Ratio 169 213 StpEN Linear Fieldbus format UInt Default Linear Modbus format UInt Linear 0 Process is linear related to speed torque When sending a unit name you send one character at a time starting at the right most position Process Min 324 This function sets the minimum process value allowed 324 Process Min StpfN 0 Default 0 0 000 10000 Speed Torque F Speed Range F Torque 10000 10000 F AnIn PT100 F Bus Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43310 Profibus slot index 169 214 Fieldbus format Long 120 001 Modbus format EInt Process Max 325 This menu is not visible when speed torque or fre quency is selected The function sets the value of the maximum process value allowed 325 Process Max StpFA 0 Default 0 Process is quadratic related to speed Quadratic 1 torque Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43312 Profibus slot index 169 216 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Process unit Pr
224. o the manual for the PTC PT100 option board Menu 234 PTC contains functions to enable or disa ble the PTC input Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43065 Profibus slot index 168 224 Fieldbus format UInt Modbus format Ulnt 234 Thermal Prot StpFA Off Default Off PTC and PT100 motor protection are disa Off 0 bled PTC 1 Enables the PTC protection of the motor via the insulated option board PT100 2 Enables the PT100 protection for the motor via the insulated option board Enables the PTC protection as well as the PT100 protection for the motor via the insulated option board PTC PT100 3 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43064 Profibus slot index 168 223 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt NOTE PTC option and PT100 selections can only be selected when the option board is mounted Motor Class 235 Only visible if the PTC PT100 option board is installed Set the class of motor used The trip levels for the PT100 sensor will automatically be set according to the setting in this menu 235 Mot Class F 140 C StpFX Default F 140 C A 100 C E 115 C B 120 C F 140 C F Nema 145 C H 165 C aj AJ WwW NI RI Oo NOTE This menu is only valid for PT 100 PT100 Inputs 236 Sets which of PT100 inputs that should b
225. ocess Max 325 Ratio Linear Ratio Quadratic Process Min 324 Min Max Speed Speed 341 343 Fig 60 Ratio 78 Functional Description F Value Process Min 327 This function is used for scaling if no sensor is used It offers you the possibility of increasing the process accuracy by scaling the process values The process values are scaled by linking them to known data in the VSD With F Value Proc Min 327 the precise value at which the entered Process Min 324 is valid can be entered Communication information NOTE If Speed Torque or Frequency is chosen in menu 321 Proc Source menus 322 328 are hidden 327 F Val PrMin StpFA Min Default Min Min E According to Min Speed setting in 341 According to Max Speed setting in Max 2 343 0 000 10000 0 10000 0 000 10000 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43314 Profibus slot index 169 218 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 rpm Modbus format EInt Example A conveyor belt is used to transport bottles The required bottle speed needs to be within 10 to 100 bot tles s Process characteristics 10 bottles s 150 rpm 100 bottles s 1500 rpm The amount of bottles is linearly related to the speed of the conveyor belt Set up Process Min 324 10 Process Max 325 100 Ratio 326 7 linear F Value ProcMin 327 150 F Value ProcMax 328 1500 Communication
226. of 6 drives can be used Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43163 Profibus slot index 169 67 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt This function is only active if the parameter Select Drive 393 All 394 Change Cond Both StpEA Default Both Stop The Runtime of the master drive deter mines when a master drive has to be changed The change will only take place after a Power Up Stop Standby condition Trip condition Timer The master drive will be changed if the timer setting in Change Timer 395 has elapsed The change will take place imme diately So during operation the additional pumps will be stopped temporarily the new master will be selected according to the Run Time and the additional pumps will be started again It is possible to leave 2 pumps running dur ing the change operation This can be set with Drives on Change 396 Both The master drive will be changed if the timer setting in Change Timer 395 has elapsed The new master will be selected according to the elapsed Run Time The change will only take place after a Power Up Stop Standby condition Trip condition Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43164 Profibus slot index 169 68 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt NOTE If the Status feedback inputs Digln 9 to Digi
227. ommunication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43091 Profibus slot index 168 250 Fieldbus format Long 1 1s Modbus format EInt Min Alarm Trip Type 25L Select the preferred way to react to a min alarm trip Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43094 Profibus slot index 168 253 Fieldbus format UInt Modbus format Ulnt 25L Min Alarm TT Over current F 250 Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone When the time delay has elapsed the alarm will be reset if the function is active StpFA Trip B 250 Over curr F efault rip StpfN Off Selection Same as menu 25B Default Off Communication information Off 0 Off Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43092 173000 1 3600 1 3600 Profibus slot index 168 251 Mr Communication information Fieldbus format UInt Modbus format Ulnt Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43082 Profibus slot index 168 241 Max Alarm 25M Fieldbus format Long 1 1s Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone Modbus format Ent When the time delay has elapsed the alarm will be reset if the function is active 25M Max Alarm StpFEA Off Default Off Off 0 off 1 3600 1 3600 1 3600 s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43093 Profibus slot index 168 252 Fieldbus format Long 1 1s Modbus format Eln
228. op circuits are used or needed in the installation where a variable speed drive is used EN 60204 1 defines 3 stop categories Category 0 Uncontrolled STOP Stopping by switching off the supply voltage A mechan ical stop must be activated This STOP may not be implemented with the help of a variable speed drive or its input output signals Category 1 Controlled STOP Stopping until the motor has come to rest after which the mains supply is switched off This STOP may not be implemented with the help of a variable speed drive or its input output signals Category 2 Controlled STOP Stopping while the supply voltage is still present This STOP can be implemented with each of the variable speed drives STOP command stop If the application prevents this from being implemented this must be explicitly stated Furthermore every machine must be provided with an Emergency Stop function This emergency stop must ensure that the voltage at the machine contacts which could be dangerous is removed as quickly as possible without resulting in any other danger In such an Emergency Stop situation a category O or 1 stop may be used The choice will be decided on the basis of the possible risks to the machine WARNING EN 60204 1 specifies that every J machine must be provided with a category 0 NOTE With option Safe Stop a stop according EN954 1 Category 3 can be achieved See chapter 13 8 page 153 EMC and Machine
229. or JNVX 50 and 52 690 V for JNVX 69 Range 100 700 V Resolution 1V NOTE The Motor Volts value will always be stored as a 3 digit value with a resolution of 1 V Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43043 Profibus slot index 168 202 Long Fieldbus format 4 1 W Modbus format EInt Prom is the nominal VSD power 58 Functional Description Motor Current 224 Set the nominal motor current 224 Motor Curr 8 scopxMi Inom A Default Inom see note section 11 2 4 page 58 Range 25 150 x Inom Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43044 Profibus slot index 168 203 Long Fieldbus format 1 01A Modbus format Elnt Inom is the nominal VSD current WARNING Do not connect motors with less AN than 25 of the nominal power of the VSD This may disrupt the control of the motor Motor Speed 225 Set the nominal asynchronous motor speed Motor Poles 226 When the nominal speed of the motor is lt 500 rpm the additional menu for entering the number of poles 226 appears automatically In this menu the actual pole number can be set which will increase the control accuracy of the VSD 226 Motor Poles 8 stopm1 4 Default 4 Range 2 144 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43046 Profibus slot index 168 205 Fieldbu
230. ot index 169 94 Fieldbus format Int 121 rpm Modbus format Int 121 rpm StpfN rpm Default O rpm Range O 4 x Motor Sync speed Functional Description 101 Speed 2 3A8 To set the speed used when the input B1 Speed 2 on the Crane option board is active Deviation Band width 3AB To define the speed deviation window within which the VSD is in control of the motor 3A8 Speed 2 3AB Dev Bandwidt StpEN rpm StpFA rpm Default 0 Default 0 Range O 4 x Sync speed Range O 4 x Sync speed Communication information Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43186 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43191 Profibus slot index 169 90 Profibus slot index 169 95 Fieldbus format Int 1 1 rpm Fieldbus format Int 1 1 rpm Modbus format Int 1 1 rpm Modbus format Int 1 1 rpm Speed 3 3A9 To set the speed used when the input B2 Speed 3 on the Crane option board is active 3A9 Speed 3 StpfN rpm Default 0 Range O 4 x Motor Sync speed Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43187 Profibus slot index 169 91 Fieldbus format Int Modbus format Int Speed 4 3AA To set the speed used when the input B3 Speed 4 on the Crane option board is active 3AA Speed 4 StpFN rpm Default
231. otential free change over 42 COM 2 jt ae the 0 1 2 A Umay 250 VAC or 42 VDC relay output 43 N O 2 51 COM 3 Relay 3 Output potential free change over iss ene 52 N O 3 Off 0 1 2 A Umax 250 VAC or 42 VDC Technical Data 169 170 Technical Data 15 MenuList 100 Preferred View DEFAULT CUSTOM 110 1st Line Process Val 120 2nd Line Torque 200 Main Setup 210 Operation 211 Language English 212 Select Motor M1 213 Drive Mode Speed 214 Ref Control Remote 215 Run Stp Ctrl Remote 216 Reset Ctrl Remote 217 Local Rem Off 2171 LocRefCtrl Standard 2172 LocRunCtrl Standard 218 Lock Code 0 219 Rotation R L 21A Level Edge Level 21B Supply Volts Not Defined 220 Motor Data 221 Motor Volts Unom V 222 Motor Freq 50Hz 223 Motor Power Pom W 224 Motor Curr INom A 225 Motor Speed nor rpm 226 Motor Poles 227 Motor Cose Depends on Phom 228 Motor Vent Self 229 Motor ID Run Off 22B Encoder Off 22C Enc Pulses 1024 22D Enc Speed Orpm 230 Mot Protect 231 Mot I t Type Trip 232 Mot It Curr 100 233 Mot It Time 60s 234 Thermal Prot Off 235 Motor Class F 140 C 236 PT100 Inputs 237 Motor PTC Off 240 Set Handlin
232. output signal T1Q will switch automatically from high to low etc according to the set interval times See Fig 99 The output signal can be programmed to the digital or relay outputs used in logic functions 620 and 630 or as a virtual connection source 560 NOTE The actual timers are common for all parameter sets If the actual set is changed the timer functionality 641 to 645 will change according set settings but the timer value will stay unchanged So initialization of the timer might differ for a set change compared to normal triggering of a timer Timer41 Trig E T1Q Fig 99 Timer 1 Trig 641 641 Timerl Trig StpFA Off Default Off Selection Same selections as Digital Output 1 menu 541 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43431 Profibus slot index 170 80 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Functional Description 131 Timer 1 Mode 642 642 Timerl Mode StpEN Off Default Off Off 0 Delay 1 Alternate 2 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43432 Profibus slot index 170 81 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Timer 1 Delay 643 This menu is only visible when timer mode is set to delay This menu can only be edited as in alternative 2 see section 9 5 page 44 Timer 1 delay sets the time tha
233. outputs 1 AnOut1 2 AnOut2 Reading downwards from the first row to the second row the status of the belonging output is shown in 96 100 AnOut1 has a negative 100 output value 65 AnOut2 has a 6596 output value The example in Fig 105 indicates that both the Ana logue outputs are active NOTE The shown percentages are absolute values based on the full range scale of the in our output so related to either 0 10 V or 0 20 mA 138 Functional Description I O board Status 728 72A Indicates the status for the additional I O on option boards 1 B1 2 B2 and 3 B3 728 IO B1 Stp REOOO DI10 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 31025 31027 Profibus slot index 121 170 172 Fieldbus format Ulnt bit O Digln1 bit 1 DigIn2 bit 2 DigIn3 bit 8 Relay1 bit 9 Relay2 bit 10 Relay3 Modbus format 11 7 3 Stored values 730 The shown values are the actual values built up over time Values are stored at power down and updated again at power up Run Time 731 Displays the total time that the VSD has been in the Run Mode 731 Run Time Reset Run Time 7311 Reset the run time counter The stored information will be erased and a new registration period will start 7311 Reset RunTm Stp No Default No No 0 Yes 1 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 7 Profi
234. p 554 B oard 1 Relay 1 Of 625 YComp3 CD1 555 B oard 1 Relay 2 Of 630 Logic Z 556 B oard 1 Relay 3 Of 631 ZComp 1 CA1 557 B oard 2 Relay 1 Of 632 Z Operator 1 amp 558 B oard 2 Relay 2 Of 633 Z Comp2 1A2 559 B oard 2 Relay 3 Of 634 Z Operator 2 amp 55A B oard 3 Relay 1 Of 635 Z Comp 3 CD1 55B B oard 3 Relay 2 Of 640 Timer1 55C B oard 3 Relay 3 Of 641 Timer1 Trig Off 55D Relay Adv 642 Timer1 Mode Off 55D1 Relay 1 Mode N O 643 Timer1 Delay 0 00 00 55D2 Relay 2 Mode N O 644 Timer 1 T1 0 00 00 55D3 Relay 3 Mode N O 645 Timer1 T2 0 00 00 55D4 B1R1 Mode N O 649 Timer1 Value 0 00 00 55D5 B1R2 Mode N O 650 Timer2 174 Menu List DEFAULT CUSTOM 651 Timer2 Trig Off 652 Timer2 Mode Off 653 Timer2 Delay 0 00 00 654 Timer2 T1 0 00 00 655 Timer2 T2 0 00 00 659 Tmer2 Value 0 00 00 700 Oper Status 710 Operation 711 Process Val 712 Speed 713 Torque 714 Shaft Power 715 Electrical Power 716 Current 717 Output volt 718 Frequency 719 DC Voltage 71A Heatsink Tmp 71B PT100123 720 Status 1 721 VSD Status 722 Warning 723 Digln Status 724 DigOut Status 725 Anln Status 1 2 726 Anln Status 3 4 727 AnOut Status 1 2 728 IO Status B1 729 IO Status B2 72A IO Status B3 730 Stored Val 731 Run Time 00 00 00 7311 Reset RunTm No 732 Mains Time 00 00 00 733 Energy kWh 7331 Rst Energy No
235. paint 10 Only valid for B White paint 0003 0046 RAL9010 A Standard 11 11 a Boards boards P V Coated boards 12 12 Option position 1 N No option C Crane 1 0 13 13 Option position 2 E Encoder P PTC PT100 T I Extended 1 0 14 14 Option position 3 S Safe Stop only 0003 0046 N No option Option position com4 D DeviceNet 15 15 RNR tia P Profibus S RS232 485 M Modbus TCP 16 16 Software type A Standard 17 17 Motor PTC Only N No option valid for 0003 0046 P PTC Gland kit alangsnot i included 18 18 Only valid for 0003 0046 G Gland kit included 1 4 Standards The variable speed drives described in this instruction manual comply with the standards listed in Table 1 For WARNING The standard VSD complying with category C3 is not intended to be used on a low voltage public network which supplies domestic premises radio interference is expected if used in such a network Contact your supplier if you need additional measures CAUTION In order to comply fully with the standards stated in the Manufacturer s Declaration ANNEX IIB the installation instructions detailed in this instruction manual must be followed to the letter 6 Introduction Table l Standards Market Standard Description Machine Directive 98 37 EEC EMC Directive 2004 108 EEC European Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC WEEE Directive 2002 96 EC Safety of machinery Electrical equipment of mac
236. pends on the characteristics and behaviour of the process If the selection Speed Torque or Frequency is set the VSD will use speed torque or frequency as reference value Example An axial fan is speed controlled and there is no feed back signal available The process needs to be control led within fixed process values in m3 hr anda process read out of the air flow is needed The charac teristic of this fan is that the air flow is linearly related to the actual speed So by selecting F Speed as the Process Source the process can easily be controlled The selection F xx indicates that a process unit and scaling is needed set in menus 322 328 This makes it possible to e g use pressure sensors to meas ure flow etc If F AnIn is selected the source is auto matically connected to the AnIn which has Process Value as selected 1 Only when Drive mode 213 is set to Speed or V Hz Only when Drive mode 213 is set to Torque NOTE When PT100 is selected use PT100 channel 1 on the PTC PT100 option board NOTE If Speed Torque or Frequency is chosen in menu 321 Proc Source menus 322 328 are hidden NOTE The motor control method depends on the selection of drive mode 213 regardless of selected process source 321 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43302 Profibus slot index 169 206 Fieldbus format UInt Modbus format Ulnt Process U
237. presen Pmot Motor power kW tation unit gines TNoM Nominal torque of motor Nm EInt Communication format Tad Motor torque Nm UInt Communication format four Output frequency of VSD Hz Int Communication Tormak fMoT Nominal frequency of motor Hz Long Communication format mS Nominal speed of motor rpm 8 The function cannot be changed in run mode m Maximum output current ARMS Speed Actual motor speed rom Torque Actual motor torque Nm RE Synchronous speed of the motor rpm 8 Introduction 2 Mounting This chapter describes how to mount the VSD Before mounting it is recommended that the installa tion is planned out first Besurethat the VSD suits the mounting location The mounting site must support the weight of the VSD Will the VSD continuously withstand vibrations and or shocks Consider using a vibration damper Check ambient conditions ratings required cooling air flow compatibility of the motor etc Know how the VSD will be lifted and transported 2 1 Lifting instructions Note To prevent personal risks and any damage to the unit during lifting it is advised that the lifting methods described below are used Recommended for VSD models 0090 to 0250 Load 56 to 74 kg Fig 2 Lifting VSD model 0090 to 0250 Recommended for VSD models 0300 to 1500 Lifting eye Fig 3 Remove the roof plate Terminals for roof fan unit supply cabl
238. ption Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43126 Profibus slot index 169 30 Fieldbus format Int 121 rpm Modbus format Int 121 rpm Skip Speed 2 High 347 The same function as menu 345 for the 2nd skip range 347 SkipSpd 2 Hi StpiN Orpm Default O rpm Range O 4x Motor Sync Speed Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43127 Profibus slot index 169 31 Fieldbus format Int 121 rpm Modbus format Int 121 rpm Jog Speed 348 The Jog Speed function is activated by one of the digital inputs The digital input must be set to the Jog function 520 The Jog command function will automatically generate a run command as long as the Jog command function is active The rotation is determined by the polarity of the set Jog Speed Example If Jog Speed 10 this will give a Run Left command at 10 rpm regardless of RunL or RunR commands Fig 70 shows the function of the Jog command function 348 Jog Speed 50rpm StpFA Default 50 rpm 4 x motor sync speed to 4 x motor sync Range speed Defined motor sync speed Max 400 nor4 PSBORDSHE on mally max VSD lmax Motor lhom x 10096 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43128 Profibus slot index 169 32 Fieldbus format Int Modbus format Int Jog Freq Jog com
239. r of additional drives Example If the number of drives is set to 6 the maximum value will be 4 This function is only active if Select Drive 393 AII 397 Upper Band StpFA 10 Default 10 Range 0 100 of total min speed to max speed Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43167 Profibus slot index 169 71 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 Modbus format Elnt Example Max Speed 1500 rpm Min Speed 300 rpm Upper Band 10 Start delay will be activated Range Max Speed to Min Speed 1500 300 1200 rpm 10 of 1200 rpm 120 rpm Start level 1500 120 1380 rpm 396 Drives on Ch StpEX 0 Default O0 Range O to the number of drives 2 Communication information Speed next pump starts Max z Mini wai 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 I 1 1 1 D Flow Pressure Start Delay 399 NG 50 PC 12 1 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43166 Profibus slot index 169 70 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Fig 78 Upper band Lower Band 398 If the speed of the master drive comes into the lower band an additional drive will be stopped after a delay time This delay time is set in the parameter Stop Delay 39A 398 Lower Band StpEA 10
240. re EmoSoftCom default set for level control and will be active as long as the input is made and kept high When edge control is selected the input will be activated by the low to high 21B Supply Volts transition of the input StpE Not defined Default Not defined 21A Level Edge E P A nverter default value used Only valid i SCpEX Level Nor penned this parameter is never set Default Level 220 240V 1 Only valid for JNVX40 48 The inputs are activated or deactivated 380 415V 3 Only valid for JNVX40 48 50 Level o pyacontinuous high or low signal Is 440 480V 4 Only valid for JNVX48 50 52 commonly used if for example a PLC is used to operate the VSD 500 525V 5 Only valid for JNVX50 52 69 550 600 V 6 Only valid for JNVX69 Functional Description 57 660 690V 7 Only valid for JNVX69 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43381 Profibus slot index 170 30 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt 11 2 4 Motor Data 220 In this menu you enter the motor data to adapt the VSD to the connected motor This will increase the control accuracy as well as different read outs and analogue output signals Motor M1 is selected as default and motor data entered will be valid for motor M1 If you have more than one motor you need to select the correct motor in menu 212 before entering motor data NOTE The parameters for motor data cannot be chan
241. rrent 224 reduced I gt I nom 15 M according to Motor ventilation 228 see Fig 58 Brake 16 The output is used to control a mechanical brake One of the Anin input signals is lower Senl lt Offset 17 than 75 of the threshold level Alarm 18 The max or min alarm level has been reached Pre Alarm 19 The max or min pre alarm level has been reached 120 Functional Description Mex Alarm 20 eds alarm level has been Digln 3 73 Digital input 3 Digln 4 74 Digital input 4 Max PreAlarm 21 Me max pre alarm level has been Digln 5 75 Digital input 5 reached Min Alarm 22 The min alarm level has been bigin 6 E Digital input 6 reached Digln 7 77 Digital input 7 Min PreAlarm 23 dun pre alarm Level has been Digln 8 78 Digital input 8 ManRst Tri 79 Active trip that needs to be manually LY 24 Logic output Y p reset ILY 25 Logic output Y inverted Com Error 80 Serial communication lost LZ 26 Logic output Z External Fan 81 em cooling ILZ 27 Logic output Z inverted LC P 2 Acti liquid li CA 1 28 Analogue comparator 1 output Amp purae gg COANE PUMP IA1 29 Analogue comp 1 inverted output LC HE Fan 83 2 quia cooling heat exchanger one 30 Analogue comparator 2 output LC Level 84 Liquid cooling low level signal ac
242. rt Delay 414 This parameter is used if for example you want to over ride an alarm during the start up procedure Sets the delay time after a run command after which the alarm may be given f Ramp Alarm On The start delay begins after a RUN command f Ramp Alarm Off The start delay begins after the acceleration ramp 414 Start Delay StpEX 2s Default 2s Range 0 3600 s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43324 Profibus slot index 169 228 Fieldbus format Long 1215s Modbus format Elnt Functional Description 103 Load Type 415 In this menu you select monitor type according to the load characteristic of your application By selecting the required monitor type the overload and underload alarm function can be optimized according to the load characteristic When the application has a constant load over the whole speed range i e extruder or screw compressor the load type can be set to basic This type uses a sin gle value as a reference for the nominal load This value is used for the complete speed range of the VSD The value can be set or automatically measured See Auto set Alarm 41A and Normal Load 41B about setting the nominal load reference The load curve mode uses an interpolated curve with 9 load values at 8 equal speed intervals This curve is populated by a test run with a real load This can be used with any smooth load cu
243. rve including constant load Load Max Alarm Basic Min Alarm Load curve Speed Fig 85 415 Load Type StpFA Basic Default Basic Uses a fixed maximum and minimum load level over the full speed range Can be used Basic O0 EAM i zv in situations where the torque is independ ent of the speed Load 1 Uses the measured actual load characteris4 Curve tic of the process over the speed range Communication information Max Alarm 416 Max Alarm Margin 4161 With load type Basic 415 used the Max Alarm Margin sets the band above the Normal Load 41B menu that does not generate an alarm With load type Load Curve 415 used the Max Alarm Margin sets the band above the Load Curve 41C that does not generate an alarm The Max Alarm Margin is a percentage of nomi nal motor torque 4161 MaxAlarmMar StpEX 15 Default 1596 Range 0 40096 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43326 Profibus slot index 169 230 Fieldbus format Long 1 196 Modbus format EInt Max Alarm delay 4162 Sets the delay time between the first occurrence of max alarm condition and after when the alarm is given 4162 MaxAlarmDel StpEA 0 1s Default O 1s Range 0 90 s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43330 Profibus slot index 169 234 Fieldbus format Long 120 1 s Modbus format EI
244. ry if the mounting plate is painted All the varia ble speed drives have an unpainted back side and are therefore suitable for mounting on an unpainted mounting plate Connect the motor cables according to U U V V and W W see Fig 20 and Fig 21 NOTE The terminals DC DC and R are options Switches between the motor and the VSD If the motor cables are to be interrupted by mainte nance switches output coils etc it is necessary that the screening is continued by using metal housing metal mounting plates etc as shown in the Fig 23 Fig 24 shows an example when there is no metal mounting plate used e g if IP54 variable speed drives are used It is important to keep the circuit closed by using metal housing and cable glands 8 Q 9 Screen connection of signal cables cm jun e Q j EE o Eii ogm 2 La 7 ey A PE T l Motor cable shield connection Fig 22 Screen connection of cables Pay special attention to the following points f paint must be removed steps must be taken to prevent subsequent corrosion Repaint after making connections The fastening of the whole variable speed drive housing must be electrically connected with the mounting plate over an area which is as
245. s for the l t is reached if operating with 12096 of the lt Modbus format EInt current value Valid when start from O rpm NOTE Not the time constant of the motor 233 Mot I t Time StpEXMI 60s 100000 10000 4 z 1000 4 1000 s 120 100 480 s 120 240 s 120 120 s 12096 60 s 120 10 1 1 1 12 1 3 14 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 Actual output current l t current Fig 59 Ft function Fig 59 shows how the function integrates the square of the motor current according to the Mot I t Curr 232 and the Mot It Time 233 When the selection Trip is set in menu 231 the VSD trips if this limit is exceeded When the selection Limit is set in menu 231 the VSD reduces the torque if the integrated value is 95 or closer to the limit so that the limit cannot be exceeded NOTE If it is not possible to reduce the current the VSD will trip after exceeding 110 of the limit Example In Fig 59 the thick grey line shows the following exam ple Menu 232 Mot 12t Curr is set to 10096 1 2 x 100 12096 Menu 233 Mot l t Time is set to 1000 s This means that the VSD will trip or reduce after 1000 s if the current is 1 2 times of 10096 nominal motor cur rent 62 Functional Description Thermal Protection 234 Only visible if the PTC PT100 option board is installed Set the PTC input for thermal protection of the motor The motor thermistors PTC must comply with DIN 44081 44082 Please refer t
246. s Enter to save the setting and Esc to leave the edit mode 9 6 Copy current parameter to all sets When a parameter is displayed press the Enter key for 5 seconds Now the text To all sets is displayed Press Enter to copy the setting for current parameter to all sets 9 7 Programming example This example shows how to program a change of the Acc Time set from 2 0 s to 4 0 s The blinking cursor indicates that a change has taken place but is not saved yet If at this moment the power fails the change will not be saved Use the ESC Prev Next or the Toggle keys to proceed and to go to other menus 100 Orpm StpFA 0 0A NEXT 200 MAIN SETUP 300 Process ENTER 310 Set View Ref z KO ll Menu 100 appears after power up Press Next for menu 200 Press Next for menu 300 Press Enter for menu 310 NEXT 330 Run Stop Press Next two times StpFA for menu 330 ENTER 331 Acc Time Press Enter for menu StpiN 2 00s 331 p 331 Acc Time keep keypressed Sto 2 00s until desired value has Blinking been reached ENTER 331 Acc Time Save the changed value by pressing StpFA 4 00s Enter Fig 54 Programming example Operation via the Control Panel 45 46 Operation via the Control Panel 10 Serial communication The VSD provides possibility for different types of serial communication e Modbus RTU via RS232 485 Fieldbuses as Profibus DP and DeviceNet
247. s are optional 1 Values are valid when brake chopper electronics are built in 166 Technical Data 14 6 2 Fuses and cable dimensions according NEMA ratings Table 50 Types and fuses Mains input fuses Input Model current UL Ferraz Shawmut Arms Glass J TD A type JNVX48 0003 2 2 6 AJT6 JNVX48 0004 3 5 6 AJT6 JNVX48 0006 52 6 AJT6 JNVX48 0008 6 9 10 AJT10 JNVX48 0010 8 7 10 AJT10 JNVX48 0013 11 3 15 AJT15 JNVX48 0018 15 6 20 AJT20 JNVX48 0026 22 25 AJT25 JNVX48 0031 26 30 AJT30 JNVX48 0037 31 35 AJT35 JNVX48 0046 38 45 AJT45 JNVX48 0090 78 100 AJT100 JNVX48 0109 94 110 AJT110 JNVX48 0146 126 150 AJT150 JNVX48 0175 152 175 AJT175 JNVX48 0210 182 200 AJT200 JNVX48 0250 216 250 AJT250 JNVX48 0300 260 300 AJT300 JNVX48 0375 324 350 AJT350 JNVX48 0430 372 400 AJT400 JNVX48 0500 432 500 AJT500 JNVX48 0600 520 600 AJT600 JNVX48 0650 562 600 AJT600 JNVX48 0750 648 700 A4BQ700 JNVX48 0860 744 800 A4BQ800 JNVX48 1000 864 1000 A4BQ1000 JNVX48 1200 1037 1200 A4BQ1200 JNVX48 1500 1296 1500 A4BQ1500 Technical Data 167 Table 51 Type cables cross sections and glands Cable cross section connector Mains and motor Brake PE Model Cable type Tightening Tightening Tightening Range torque Range torque Rang
248. s format Long 1 1 pole Modbus format Elnt Motor Cos 227 Set the nominal Motor cosphi power factor 227 Motor Coso 8 scopyui 225 Motor Speed 8 StpENM1 Nyor rpm Default npor see note section 11 2 4 page 58 Range 50 18000 rpm Resolution 1 rpm 4 sign digits WARNING Do NOT enter a synchronous no J load motor speed NOTE Maximum speed 343 is not automatically changed when the motor speed is changed NOTE Entering a wrong too low value can cause a dangerous situation for the driven application due to high speeds Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43045 Profibus slot index 168 204 Ulnt Fieldbus format 1 1 rpm Modbus format Ulnt Default Pnom see note section 11 2 4 page 58 Range 0 50 1 00 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43047 Profibus slot index 168 206 Fieldbus format Long 120 01 Modbus format EInt Motor ventilation 228 Parameter for setting the type of motor ventilation Affects the characteristics of the I t motor protection by lowering the actual overload current at lower speeds 228 Motor Vent 8 StpEAMI Self Default Self None O Limited It overload curve Normal t overload curve Means that the Self 1 motor stands lower current at low speed Expanded I t overload cur
249. s on the VSD having high temperature DC link residual voltage WARNING After switching off the mains supply dangerous voltage can still be present in the VSD When opening the VSD for installing and or commissioning activities wait at least 5 minutes In case of malfunction a qualified technician should check the DC link or wait for one hour before dismantling the VSD for repair Contents 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 4 1 1 5 1 5 1 1 6 1 6 1 1 6 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 3 2 3 1 2 3 2 3 1 3 2 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 5 1 3 5 2 3 6 3 7 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 5 1 4 5 2 4 5 3 4 5 4 4 5 5 4 5 6 4 6 Safety Instructions 1 Contents anatina nasaan naadi a 3 Introduction eres 5 Delivery and UNPACKING eese 5 Using of the instruction manual 5 Type code number eres 5 Standards 04 iiec te beer Rennen ted 6 Product standard for EMC esses 6 Dismantling and scrapping eeessessss 7 Disposal of old electrical and electronic equipment 7 GlosSdby 5 a abd ne eae 8 Abbreviations and symbols sees 8 Defititioris e ea ERU E reete 8 Mounting erreur ini trees 9 Lifting instructions eese 9 Stand alone units esses 10 aree ie
250. s over ruled and the VSD is decreasing the speed as long as the PID error is within the steady state margin If the PID error goes outside the steady state margin the test failed and normal PID operation continues see exam ple 389 PID Stdy Mar StpfiN 0 Default 0 Range 0 10000 in process unit Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43374 Profibus slot index 170 23 Fieldbus format Long 120 01 s Modbus format EInt Functional Description 93 Example The PID Steady Test starts when the process value 711 is within the margin and Steady State Test Wait Delay has expired The PID output will decrease speed with a step value which corresponds to the mar gin as long as the Process value 711 stays within steady state margin When Min Speed 341 is reached the steady state test was successful and stop sleep is commanded if PID sleep function 386 and 387 is activated If the Process value 711 goes outside the set steady state margins then the test failed and nor mal PID operation will continue see Fig 77 711 Process Value 310 Process Ref 388 Start steady 712 Speed Normal PID test 341 Min Speed Steady state Stop steady state test state test Normal PID Fig 77 Steady state test 11 3 10Pump Fan Control 390 The Pump Control functions are in menu 390 The function is used to control
251. s requires two or more maximum speeds and acceleration deceleration times With the four parame ter sets different control options can be configured with respect to quickly changing the behaviour of the VSD It is possible to adapt the VSD online to altered machine behaviour This is based on the fact that at any desired moment any one of the four parameter sets can be acti vated during Run or Stop via the digital inputs or the control panel and menu 241 Each parameter set can be selected externally via a dig ital input Parameter sets can be changed during opera tion and stored in the control panel NOTE The only data not included in the parameter set is Motor data 1 4 entered separately language communication settings selected set local remote and keyboard locked Define parameter sets When using parameter sets you first decide how to select different parameter sets The parameter sets can be selected via the control panel via digital inputs or via serial communication All digital inputs and vir tual inputs can be configured to select parameter set The function of the digital inputs is defined in the menu 520 Fig 37 shows the way the parameter sets are activated via any digital input configured to Set Ctrl 1 or Set Ctrl 2 Parameter Set A Run Stop Set B Torques Set C Set D Controllers Limits Prot Max Alarm 11 2
252. s set to Speed Example 1 Add signals with different weight fine tun ing Signal on AnIn1 10 mA Signal on AnIn2 5 mA 511 AnIn1 Function Process Ref 512 AnIn1 Setup 4 20 mA 5134 AnIn1 Function Min Min O rpm 5136 AnIn1 Function Max Max 1500 rpm 5138 AnIn1 Operation Add 514 AnIn2 Function Process Ref 515 AnIn2 Setup 4 20 mA 5164 AnIn2 Function Min Min O rpm 5166 AnIn2 Function Max User defined 5167 AnIn2 Value Max 300 rpm 5168 AnIn2 Operation Add Calculation Anln1 10 4 20 4 x 1500 0 0 562 5 rpm Anin2 5 4 20 4 x 300 0 O 18 75 rpm The actual process reference will be 562 5 18 75 581 rpm Analogue Input Selection via Digital Inputs When two different external Reference signals are used e g 4 20mA signal from control centre and a O 10 V locally mounted potentiometer it is possible to switch between these two different analogue input sig nals via a Digital Input set to Anin Select Anln1 is 4 20 mA Anln2 is 0 10 V Digln3 is controlling the AnIn selection HIGH is 4 20 mA LOW is O 10 V 511 Anln1 Fc Process Ref set AnIn1 as reference signal input 512 AnIn1 Setup 4 20mA set AnIn1 for a current reference signal 513A AnIn1 Enable Digln set AnIn1 to be active when Digln3 is HIGH 514 AnIn2 Fc Process Ref set AnIn2 as reference signal input 515 AnIn2 Setup O 10V set AnIn2 for a voltage refere
253. settings in different stages of the process to increase the process quality increase control accuracy lower maintenance costs increase operator safety With these settings a large number of options are avail able Some ideas are given here Multi frequency selection Within a single parameter set the 7 preset references can be selected via the digital inputs In combination with the parameter sets 28 preset references can be selected using all 4 digital inputs DigIn1 2 and 3 for selecting preset reference within one parameter set and Digln 4 and Digln 5 for selecting the parameter sets Main Features 33 Bottling machine with 3 different products Use 3 parameter sets for 3 different Jog reference speeds when the machine needs to be set up The 4th parameter set can be used for normal remote control when the machine is running at full production Product changing on winding machines If a machine has to change between 2 or 3 different products e g winding machine with different gauges of thread it is important that acceleration deceleration times Max Speed and Max Torque are adapted For each thread size a different parameter set can be used Manual automatic control If in an application something is filled up manually and then the level is automatically controlled using PID reg ulation this is solved using one parameter set for the manual control and one for the automatic control 7 1 1 One motor and on
254. ss the key until the character U is displayed 3 Press Next 4 Then press the key until S is displayed and con firm with Next 5 Repeat until you have entered USER15 923 Unit Name Stp Default No characters shown Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 42301 42312 Profibus slot index 165 225 236 Fieldbus format UInt Modbus format Ulnt When sending a unit name you send one character at a time starting at the right most position Functional Description 143 144 Functional Description 12 Troubleshooting Diagnoses and Maintenance 12 1 Trips warnings and limits In order to protect the variable speed drive the principal operating variables are continuously monitored by the system If one of these variables exceeds the safety limit an error warning message is displayed In order to avoid any possibly dangerous situations the inverter sets itself into a stop Mode called Trip and the cause of the trip is shown in the display Trips will always stop the VSD Trips can be divided into normal and soft trips depending on the setup Trip Type Limits The inverter is limiting torque and or frequency to avoid a trip The Limit relay or output is active if selected The Trip LED is blinking Oneofthe Limit status indications is displayed area D of the display Table 30 List of trips and warnings
255. ss val 120 001 Modbus format EInt Fieldbus format Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43555 Profibus slot index 170 204 Long Speed 1 71 rpm Torque 17196 Process val 120 001 Fieldbus format Modbus format EInt AnOut2 Function 534 Sets the function for the Analogue Output 2 534 AnOut2 Fc AnOut1 Function Max 5336 With AnOut1 Function Min the physical minimum value is scaled to selected presentation The default scaling is dependent on the selected function of AnOut1 531 See Table 27 StpEA Torque Default Torque Selection Same as in menu 531 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43261 5336 AnOutlFCMax Profibus slot index 169 165 Fieldbus format UInt Modbus format UInt StpEy Max Default Max Min O Min value Max 1 Max value User defined 2 Define user value in menu 5337 Functional Description 119 AnOut2 Setup 535 Preset scaling and offset of the output configuration for analogue output 2 535 AnOut2 Setup StpFA 4 20mA Default 4 20mA Selection Same as in menu 532 Communication information 11 5 4 Digital Outputs 540 Submenu with all the settings for the digital outputs Digital Out 1 541 Sets the function for the digital output 1 NOTE The definitions described here are valid for the active output co
256. stance no DeviceNet no 43106 Profibus slot index 169 10 Fieldbus format Long 120 01 s Modbus format Elnt Functional Description 81 Acceleration Ramp Type 337 Sets the type of all the acceleration ramps in a parame ter set See Fig 65 Depending on the acceleration and deceleration requirements for the application the shape of both the ramps can be selected For applica tions where speed changes need to be started and stopped smoothly such as a conveyor belt with materi als that can drop following a quick speed change the ramp shape can be adapted to a S shape and prevent speed change shocks For applications that are not crit ical in this the speed change can be fully linear over the complete range 337 Acc Rmp StpFN Linear Default Linear Linear 0 Linear acceleration ramp S Curve 1 S shape acceleration ramp NOTE For S curve ramps the ramp times 331 and 332 defines the maximum acceleration and deceleration rated i e linear part of S curve just as for the linear ramps The S curves are implemented so that for a speed step below sync speed the ramps are fully S shaped while for larger steps the middle part will be linear Therefore will a S curve ramp from O sync speed take 2 x Time while a step from 0 2 x sync speed will take 3 x Time middle part 0 5sync speed 1 5sync speed linear Also valid for menu 337 D eceleration ramp type Deceleration R
257. t Max Alarm Trip Type 25N Select the preferred way to react to a max alarm trip 25N Max Alarm TT StpEN Trip Default Trip Selection Same as menu 25B Over Speed 25Q Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone When the time delay has elapsed the alarm will be reset if the function is active 250 Over speed StpEA Off Default Off Off 0 Off 1 3600 1 3600 1 3600 s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43096 Profibus slot index 169 0 Fieldbus format Long 1721s Modbus format EInt Functional Description 71 External Motor Temperature 25R Delay time starts counting when the fault disappears When the time delay has elapsed the alarm will be reset if the function is active Communication information 25R Ext Mot Temp StpEN Off Default Off Off 0 off 1 3600 1 3600 1 3600 s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43097 Profibus slot index 168 239 Fieldbus format Long 1 1s Modbus format Elnt External Motor Trip Type 25S Select the preferred way to react to an alarm trip StpFA Default Trip 25S Ext Mot TT Trip Selection Same as menu 25B Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43098 Profibus slot index 168 240 Fieldbus format UInt Modbus format UInt
258. t Cti3 ctri2 Ctrl Output Speed 0 Analogue reference 19 Preset Ref 1 19 Preset Ref 2 ojoj ojo o Preset Ref 3 e E Preset Ref 4 Preset Ref 5 Preset Ref 6 HP BE BR of of B elolelolelo Preset Ref 7 D selected if only one preset reference is active 1 active input O non active input NOTE If only Preset Ctrl3 is active then the Preset Ref 4 can be selected If Presets Ctrl2 and 3 are active then the Preset Ref 2 4 and 6 can be selected Keyboard reference mode 369 This parameter sets how the reference value 310 is edited 369 Key Ref Mode Normal 11 3 8 PI Speed Control 370 The VSD has an internal speed controller which is used to keep the shaft speed equal to the set speed refer ence This internal speed controller works without an external feedback With the parameters speed P gain 372 and speed time 373 the controller can be optimized manually Speed PI Autotune 371 The function speed autotune will perform a torque step change and measures the reaction on shaft speed It automatically sets the internal speed time to its opti mum value The speed PI autotune must be done dur ing operation with the motor load connected and the motor running Spd PI Auto will be blinking in the dis play during the autotune operation When the test is successfully concluded the display will show Spd PI OK for
259. t Elnt Speed Max di top pump stops immediately puces NOY o Lower band limit 39C 1 1 1 1 l I Min Veseedbeued ekessesss i i 1 l 1 i l Flow Pressure Stop Delay 39A NG_50 PC 15_2 Fig 81 Lower band limit Settle Time Start 39D The settle start allows the process to settle after a pump is switched on before the pump control contin ues If an additional pump is started D O L Direct On Line or Y A the flow or pressure can still fluctuate due to the rough start stop method This could cause unnecessary starting and stopping of additional pumps During the Settle start e PID controller is off The speed is kept at a fixed level after adding a pump 39D Settle Start StpEX 0s Default Os Range 0 999 s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43173 Profibus slot index 169 77 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 s Modbus format Elnt Transition Speed Start 39E The transition speed start is used to minimize a flow pressure overshoot when adding another pump When an additional pump needs to be switched on the mas ter pump will slow down to the set transition speed start value before the additional pump is started The setting depends on the dynamics of both the master drive and the additional drives The trans
260. t UInt Spinstart 33A The spinstart will smoothly start a motor which is already rotating by catching the motor at the actual speed and control it to the desired speed If in an appli cation such as an exhausting fan the motor shaft is already rotating due to external conditions a smooth start of the application is required to prevent excessive wear With the spinstart on the actual control of the motor is delayed due to detecting the actual speed and rotation direction which depend on motor size running conditions of the motor before the Spinstart inertia of the application etc Depending on the motor electrical time constant and the size of the motor it can take maximum a couple of minutes before the motor is caught Profibus slot index 169 15 Fieldbus format UInt Modbus format UInt 33A Spinstart StpPEA Off Default Off Off 0 No spinstart If the motor is already running the VSD can trip or will start with high current Spinstart will allow the start of a running On 1 I AN motor without tripping or high inrush currents Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43110 Profibus slot index 169 14 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format UInt 11 3 4 Mechanical brake control The four brake related menus 33C to 33F can be used to control mechanical brakes e g to handle basic hoisting functions When hoisting a load generally a m
261. t Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Relay 2 552 NOTE The definitions described here are valid for the active output condition Sets the function for the relay output 2 552 Relay 2 StpfN Run Default Run Selection Same as in menu 541 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43274 Profibus slot index 169 178 Fieldbus format UlInt Modbus format UInt Board Relay 554 to 55C These additional relays are only visible if an I O option board is fitted in slot 1 2 or 3 The outputs are named B1 Relay 1 3 B2 Relay 1 3 and B3 Relay 1 3 B stands for board and 1 3 is the number of the board which is related to the position of the I O option board on the option mounting plate NOTE Visible only if optional board is detected or if any input output is activated 122 Functional Description Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43511 43519 Profibus slot index 170 160 170 168 Fieldbus format UInt Modbus format UInt Relay Advanced 55D This function makes it possible to ensure that the relay will also be closed when the VSD is malfunctioning or powered down Example A process always requires a certain minimum flow To control the required number of pumps by the relay mode NC the e g the pumps can be controlled nor mally by the pump control but are also activated wh
262. t for time set in parameter 2642 2 If a serious network error has occurred Trip 1 Warning 2 NOTE Menu 214 and or 215 must be set to COM to activate the communication fault function Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43037 Profibus slot index 168 196 Fieldbus format UInt Modbus format Ulnt Communication Fault Time 2642 Defines the delay time for the trip warning 2642 ComFlt Time StpfN 0 5s Default 0 5s Range 0 1 15 s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43038 Profibus slot index 168 197 Fieldbus format Long 1 0 1 s Modbus format Elnt Ethernet 265 Settings for Ethernet module Modbus TCP For further information see the Fieldbus option manual NOTE The Ethernet module must be re booted to activate the below settings For example by toggling parameter 261 Non initialized settings indicated by flashing display text IP Address 2651 2651 IP Address 0 0 0 O Default 0 0 0 0 MAC Address 2652 2652 MAC Address StpEN000000000000 Default An unique number for the Ethernet module Subnet Mask 2653 2653 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 O Default 0 0 0 0 Gateway 2654 2654 Gateway 0 0 O O Default 0 0 0 0 74 Functional Description DHCP 2655 2655 DHCP
263. t no 43204 Profibus slot index 169 108 Fieldbus format Long Modbus format Elnt Special function Inverted reference signal If the Anin minimum value is higher than the Anin maxi mum value the input will act as an inverted reference input see Fig 91 100 Invert Anln Min gt Anin Max Ref NG_06 F25 0 10V Fig 91 Inverted reference Anln1 Bipol 5133 This menu is automatically displayed if AnIn1 Setup is set to User Bipol mA or User Bipol V The window will automatically show mA or V range according to selected function The range is set by changing the positive max imum value the negative value is automatically adapted accordingly Only visible if 512 User Bipol mA V The inputs RunR and RunL input need to be active and Rotation 219 must be set to R L to operate the bipolar function on the analogue input Communication information 5133 AnIn1 Bipol Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43203 Stp 10 00V Default 0 00 10 00 V Range 0 0 20 0 mA 0 00 10 00 V Profibus slot index 169 107 Fieldbus format Long Modbus format EInt Functional Description 111 Communication information Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43205 Profibus slot index 169 109 Fieldbus format Long Modbus format EInt Anin1 Function Min 5134 With AnIn1 Function Min the p
264. t where the VSD is installed 3 1 Before installation Read the following checklist and think through your application before installation External or internal control Long motor cables gt 100m refer to section Long motor cables Motors in parallel refer to menu 213 Functions Suitable VSD size in proportion to the motor appli cation Mount separately supplied option boards according to the instructions in the appropriate option manual If the VSD is temporarily stored before being connected please check the technical data for environmental con ditions If the VSD is moved from a cold storage room to the room where it is to be installed condensation can form on it Allow the VSD to become fully acclimatised and wait until any visible condensation has evaporated before connecting the mains voltage 3 2 Cable connections for 0003 to 0073 3 2 1 Mains cables Dimension the mains and motor cables according to local regulations The cable must be able to carry the VSD load current Recommendations for selecting mains cables e To fulfil EMC purposes it is not necessary to use screened mains cables Use heat resistant cables 60 C or higher Dimension the cables and fuses in accordance with local regulations and the nominal current of the motor See table 49 page 165 Thelitz ground connection see fig 23 is only neces sary if the mounting plate is painted All the variable speed
265. t will be used by the first timer after it is activated Timer 1 can be activated by a high signal on a Digln that is set to Timer 1 or via a vir tual destination 560 643 TimerlDelay Stp RN 0 00 00 Timer 1 T1 644 When timer mode is set to Alternate and Timer 1 is ena bled this timer will automatically keep on switching according to the independently programmable up and down times The Timer 1 in Alternate mode can be ena bled by a digital input or via a virtual connection See Fig 99 Timer 1 T1 sets the up time in the alternate mode 644 Timer 1 T1 StpEA 0 00 00 0 00 00 hr min sec Default Range 0 00 00 9 59 59 Communication information 43436 hours Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43437 minutes 43438 seconds 170 85 170 86 Profibus slot index 170 87 Fieldbus format UInt Modbus format UInt Timer 1 T2 645 Timer 1 T2 sets the down time in the alternate mode 645 Timerl T2 StpfN 0 00 00 Default 0 00 00 hr min sec Default 0 00 00 hr min sec Range Communication information Range 0 00 00 9 59 59 0 00 00 9 59 59 Communication information 43439 hours Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43440 minutes 43441 seconds Profibus slot index 170 88 170 89 170 90 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt 43433 hours Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 4343
266. tal input e g terminal 9 in Fig 113 which is set to Enable For setting the dig ital input please refer to section 11 5 2 page 115 These two signals need to be combined and used to enable the output of the VSD and make it possible to activate a Safe Stop condition NOTE The Safe Stop condition according to EN 954 1 Category 3 can only be realized by de activating both the Inhibit and Enable inputs Options 153 When the Safe Stop condition is achieved by using these two different methods which are independently controlled this safety circuit ensures that the motor will not start running because e The 24Vp signal is taken away from the Inhibit input terminals 1 and 2 the safety relay K1 is switched off The supply voltage to the driver circuits of the power conductors is switched off This will inhibit the trig ger pulses to the power conductors The trigger pulses from the control board are shut down The Enable signal is monitored by the controller cir cuit which will forward the information to the PWM part on the Control board To make sure that the safety relay K1 has been switched off this should be guarded externally to ensure that this relay did not refuse to act The Safe Stop option board offers a feedback signal for this via a second forced switched safety relay K2 which is switched on when a detection circuit has confirmed that the supply voltage to the driver circuits is shut
267. that is dependent on the speed the Load Curve monitor type is preferred By measuring the actual load curve of the process charac teristically over the range of minimum speed to maxi mum speed an accurate protection at any speed can be established The max and min alarm can be set for a trip condition The pre alarms act as a warning condition All the alarms can be monitored on the digital or relay outputs The autoset function automatically sets the 4 alarm lev els whilst running maximum alarm maximum pre alarm minimum alarm and minimum pre alarm Fig 44 gives an example of the monitor functions for constant torque applications 38 Main Features 8 EMC and Machine Directive 8 1 EMC standards The variable speed drive complies with the following standards EN IEC 61800 3 2004 Adjustable speed electronic power drive systems part 3 EMC product standards Standard category C3 for systems of rated supply voltage 1000 VAC intended for use in the second environment Optional Category C2 for systems of rated supply voltage 1 000 V which is neither a plug in device nor a movable device and when used in the first environ ment is intended to be installed and commissioned only by experienced person with the necessary skills in installing and or commissioning variable speed drives including their EMC aspects 8 2 Stop categories and emergency stop The following information is important if emergency st
268. tion of how to connect mains motor and control cables The next section describes how to use the function keys on the control panel The subsequent examples covering remote control and local control describe how to program set the motor data and run the VSD and motor 5 1 Connect the mains and motor cables Dimension the mains and motor cables according to local reg ulations The cable must be able to carry the VSD load cur rent 5 1 1 Mains cables 1 Connect the mains cables as in Fig 34 The VSD has as standard a built in RFI mains filter that complies with cat egory C3 which suits the Second Environment standard 5 1 2 Motor cables 2 Connectthe motor cables as in Fig 34 To comply with the EMC Directive you have to use screened cables and the motor cable screen has to be connected on both sides to the housing of the motor and the housing of the VSD Table 16 Mains and motor connection L1 L2 L3 Mains supply 3 phase PE Safety earth de Motor earth U V W Motor output 3 phase Metal EMC cable glands Screened cables Metal housing Brake Output resistor coils option option Metal connector housing E l Metal cable gland Motor Mains Fig 34 Connection of mains and motor cables WARNING In order to work safely the mains earth
269. tive i A2 31 Analogue comp 2 inverted output meom L Positive speed gt 0 5 i e forward CD 1 32 Digital comparator 1 output 8 clockwise direction igi i i lt 0 5 i ID1 33 Digital comp 1 inverted output Run Left 86 D E reverse CD2 34 Digital comparator 2 output i ID2 35 Digital comp 2 inverted output Com Active 87 Fieldbus communication active Run command is active or VSD run Communication information peratioti 36 ning The signal can be used to con p trol the mains contactor if the VSD is Modbus i cem T43271 equipped with Standby supply option odbus Instance no DeviceNet no T10 37 Timer output Profibus slot index 169 175 IT1Q 38 Timer1 inverted output FITUS Torma int T2Q 39 Timer2 output Modbus format Ulnt IT2Q 40 Timer2 inverted output Sleeping 41 Sleeping function activated Digital Out 2 542 Crane Deviat 42 Tripped on deviation NOTE The definitions described here are valid for the Loc Rem 57 Local Rem function is active active output condition Standby 58 Standby supply option is active PTC Trip 59 Trip when function is active Sets the function for the digital output 2 PT100 Trip 60 Trip when function is active Overvolt 61 Overvoltage due to high main voltage 542 DigOut2 StpEN Brake Overvolt G 62 Overvoltage due to generation mode Overvolt D 63 Overvoltage due to deceleration Default Brake Acc 64 Acceleration along the acc ramp Selection Same as in menu 541 Dec 65 Deceleration along the dec ramp VP
270. tor Brake level Vp c P resistor x ED Rmin Where Presistor required power of brake resistor Brake level Vpc DC brake voltage level see Table 33 and Table 34 Rmin minimum allowable brake resistor see Table 33 and Table 3441 ED effective braking period Defined as Active brake time at nominal braking Fig 109 Control panel in mounting cassette 13 2 EmoSoftCom EmoSoftCom is an optional software that runs on a per sonal computer It can also be used to load parameter settings from the VSD to the PC for backup and printing Recording can be made in oscilloscope mode Please contact TECO sales for further information ED power s Maximum value of 120 s 1 continuous braking Table 32 eet In mena 218 Brake level Vno 220 240 380 380 415 660 440 480 780 500 525 860 550 600 1000 660 690 1150 Options 151 Table 33 Brake resistor JNVX40 48 type Table 34 Brake resistors NVX50 52 V types we Teteres Rees apg Rin ohm sm Rio ea AC AC AC AC nd 43 50 0010 50 55 0013 50 55 prs Z ex 0018 50 55 SNO Vs ii 0026 30 32 TRU ae AN 0031 30 32 hiai i R 0037 20 22 cae iii 2 0046 20 22 0018 43 50 JNVX5O E 0026 26 30 0060 0031 26 30 0037 17 20 0046
271. torage Parameter Storage condition Temperature 20 to 60 C Atmospheric pressure 86 106 kPa Relative humidity non condensing 0 90 164 Technical Data 14 6 Fuses cable cross sections and glands 14 6 1 According IEC ratings Use mains fuses of the type gL gG conforming to IEC 269 or installation cut outs with similar characteristics Check the equipment first before installing the glands Max Fuse maximum fuse value that still protects the VSD and upholds warranty Table 49 Fuses cable cross sections and glands NOTE The dimensions of fuse and cable cross section are dependent on the application and must be determined in accordance with local regulations NOTE The dimensions of the power terminals used in the models 0300 to 1500 can differ depending on customer specification Nominal Maximum Cable cross section connector range mm for Cable glands clamping range input mm Model value fuse current A A mains motor Brake PE mains motor Brake JNVX 0003 2 2 4 M32 opening M25 opening JNVX 0004 35 4 M20 reducer M20 reducer JNVX 0006 5 2 6 6 12 6 12 M32 12 20 JNVX 0008 6 9 8 0 5 10 0 5 10 1 5 16 M32 opening JNVX 0010 NA 10 M25 reducer 10 14 M25 10 14 JNVX 0013 11 3 12 M32 16 25 JNVX 0018 15 6 20 M32 13 18 JNVX 0
272. torque so that the DC link voltage level is con trolled at a high but safe level This is achieved by lim iting the actual deceleration rate during stopping In case of a defect at the brake chopper or the brake resistor the VSD will trip for Overvoltage to avoid a fall of the load e g in crane applications NOTE Overvoltage control should not be activated if brake chopper is used Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43362 Profibus slot index 170 11 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt 424 Over Volt Ctl StpEX On Default On On Overvoltage control activated Off Overvoltage control off Communication information Motor lost 423 With the motor lost function enabled the VSD is able to detect a fault in the motor circuit motor motor cable thermal relay or output filter Motor lost will cause a trip and the motor will coast to standstill when a miss ing motor phase is detected during a period of 5 s 423 Motor lost Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43364 Profibus slot index 170 13 Fieldbus format UInt Modbus format Ulnt StpEN Off Default Off Off Function switched off to be used if no motor or very small motor connected Trip VSD will trip when the motor is discon nected Trip message Motor Lost Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43363 Profibus slot
273. u 611 For default value see selection table for menu 612 613 CA1 Level LO StpEA 200rpm Default 200 rpm Range Enter a value for the low level Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43403 Profibus slot index 170 52 Long 1 1 W 0 1 A 0 1 V 0 1 Hz 0 1 C 1 kWh 1H 1 1 rpm or 0 001 via process value Fieldbus format Modbus format EInt Analogue Comparator 2 Value 614 Function is identical to analogue comparator 1 value 614 CA2 Value StpEN Torque Default Torque Selections Same as in menu 611 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43404 Profibus slot index 170 53 Fieldbus format UInt Modbus format Ulnt Analogue Comparator 2 Level High 615 Function is identical to analogue comparator 1 level high 615 CA2 Level HI StpfN 20 Default 20 Range Enter a value for the high level Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43405 Profibus slot index 170 54 Long 1 1 W 0 1 A 0 1 V 0 1 Hz 0 1 C 1 kWh 1H 1 1 rpm or 0 001 via process value Fieldbus format Modbus format Elnt Analogue Comparator 2 Level Low 616 Function is identical to analogue comparator 1 level low 616 CA2 Level LO StpfN 10 Default 10 Range Enter a value for the low
274. uch a way that it tries to avoid trips by limiting torque overvolt etc Failures occurring during commissioning or shortly after commissioning are most likely to be caused by incorrect settings or even bad connections Failures or problems occurring after a reasonable period of failure free operation can be caused by changes in the system or in its environment e g wear Failures that occur regularly for no obvious reasons are generally caused by Electro Magnetic Interference Be sure that the installation fulfils the demands for instal lation stipulated in the EMC directives See chapter 8 page 39 Sometimes the so called Trial and error method is a quicker way to determine the cause of the failure This can be done at any level from changing settings and functions to disconnecting single control cables or replacing entire drives The Trip Log can be useful for determining whether cer tain trips occur at certain moments The Trip Log also records the time of the trip in relation to the run time counter 12 2 1 Technically qualified personnel Installation commissioning demounting making measurements etc of or at the variable speed drive may only be carried out by personnel technically quali fied for the task 12 2 2 Opening the variable speed drive WARNING Always switch the mains voltage off if itis necessary to open the VSD and wait at least 5 minutes to allow the capacitors to discharge WARNING
275. unction 624 Y Operator 2 StpFA amp Default amp When dot is selected the Logic Y 0 expression is finished when only two expressions are tied together amp 1 amp AND 2 0R i 3 EXOR Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43414 11 6 3 Logic Output Z 630 630 LOGIC Z StpRy CA1 amp A2 amp CD1 The expression must be programmed by means of the menus 631 to 635 Z Comp 1 631 Selects the first comparator for the logic Z function 631 Z Comp 1 StpfN CA1 Default CA1 Selection Same as menu 621 Communication information Profibus slot index 170 63 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Y Comp 3 625 Selects the third comparator for the logic Y function 625 Y Comp 3 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43421 Profibus slot index 170 70 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt Z Operator 1 632 Selects the first operator for the logic Z function 632 Z Operator 1 StpEX amp Default amp Selection Same as menu 622 Communication information StpFA CD1 Default CD1 Selection Same as menu 621 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43415 Profibus slot index 170 64 Fieldbus format UlInt Modbus format UInt Modbus Instance no DeviceNet
276. unction of AnOut1 531 Profibus slot index 169 157 Fieldbus format Long 120 01 Modbus format EInt AnOut1 Max 5332 This parameter is automatically displayed if User mA or User V is selected in menu AnOut1 Setup 532 The menu will automatically adapt to current or voltage set ting according to the selected setup Only visible if 532 User mA V 5332 AnOut 1 Max 5334 AnOutlFCMin StpEX Min Default Min Min 0 Min value Max 1 Max value User defined 2 Define user value in menu 5335 Table 27 shows corresponding values for the min and max selections depending on the function of the ana logue output 531 Table 27 Stp 20 0mA Default 20 00 mA Range 0 00 20 00 mA 0 10 00 V AnOut Function Mn vallis Max Value Communication information Process Value Process Min 324 Process Max 325 Speed Min Speed 341 Max Speed 343 Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43254 Torque 0 Max Torque 351 Process Ref Process Min 324 Process Max 325 Shaft Power 096 Motor Power 223 Profibus slot index 169 158 Fieldbus format Long 120 01 Modbus format EInt Frequency O Hz Motor Frequency 222 Current OA Motor Current 224 El Power OW Motor Power 223 Output Voltage O V Motor Voltage 221 118 Functional Description Table 27 i
277. unication information To set the speed used when crawling min speed dur ing a hoisting operation Activated with input A1 Crawl H R Start in positive speed direction Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43183 Profibus slot index 169 87 3A6 CrawlSpd H R Fieldbus format Ulnt St pf rpm Modbus format Ulnt Default 0 Range O 4 x Sync speed Crane Relay CR2 3A4 To select the function of Crane Relay CR2 on the Crane communication normae option board Same selections as for the relays on the control board Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43189 Profibus slot index 169 93 3A4 Crane Relay2 Fieldbus format Inti 1rm StpEN Brake Modbus format Int 121 rpm Default Brake ags Sameseiconsasforteregsonme Crawl speed L L 3A7 control board To set the speed used when crawling min speed dur Communication information ing lowering operation Activated with input A2 Crawl L L Start in negative speed direction Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43184 Profibus slot index 169 88 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Unt 3A7 CrawlSpd L L Pre Limit Switch Speed 3A5 To set the speed used when Pre Limit Switch on the Crane option board is active 3A5 PreLimSwSpd StpFA rpm Default 0 Range O 4 x Sync speed Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43190 Profibus sl
278. unication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 31019 31020 Profibus slot index 121 163 121 164 Fieldbus format Long 1 196 Modbus format EInt The first row indicates the analogue inputs 1 Anini 2 Anin2 Reading downwards from the first row to the second row the status of the belonging input is shown in 100 Anln1 has a negative 100 input value 65 X Anln2 has a 65 input value So the example in Fig 103 indicates that both the Ana logue inputs are active NOTE The shown percentages are absolute values based on the full range scale of the in our output so related to either 0 10 V or 0 20 mA Analogue Input Status 726 Indicates the status of the analogue inputs 3 and 4 726 AnIn 3 4 Stp 100 65 Fig 104Analogue input status Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 31021 31022 Profibus slot index 121 165 121 166 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 Modbus format Elnt Analogue Output Status 727 Indicates the status of the analogue outputs Fig 105 E g if 4 20 mA output is used the value 20 equals to 4 mA 727 AnOut 1 2 Stp 100 65 Fig 105Analogue output status Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 31023 31024 Profibus slot index 121 167 121 168 Fieldbus format Long 1 1 Modbus format Elnt The first row indicates the Analogue
279. uration 532 AnOut1 Setup 4 20mA StpEA Default 4 20mA The current output has a fixed threshold afeedback acknowledgement of the received ana 4 20mA 0 Live Zero of 4 mA and controls the full logue reference value range for the output signal See Fig 90 Normal full current scale configuration of AnOut1 Function 531 0 20mA 1 the output that controls the full range for the output signal See Fig 89 Sets the function for the Analogue Output 1 Scale and range are defined by AnOut1 Advanced settings 533 The scale of the current controlled output User mA 2 that controls the full range for the output signal Can be defined by the advanced 531 AnOutl Fc AnOut Min and AnOut Max menus StpEA Speed Sets the output for a bipolar current out User Bipol 3 put where the scale controls the range Default Speed mA for the output signal Scale can be Actual process value according to Proc defined in advanced menu AnOut Bipol Process Val O facdhackesi ESSTEEODOON SIBHON Normal full voltage scale configuration of Speed 1 Actual speed 0 10V 4 the output that controls the full range for the output signal See Fig 89 Torque 2 Actual torque P Ref 3 A i 4 i The voltage output has a fixed threshold roceSs Se Pile process FETSTERDS Valle 2 10V 5 Live Zero of 2 V and controls the full Shaft Power 4 Actual shaft power rang
280. ve Means that the Forced 2 motor stands almost the whole current also at lower speed Functional Description 59 Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43048 Profibus slot index 168 207 Fieldbus format Ulnt Modbus format Ulnt When the motor has no cooling fan None is selected and the current level is limited to 5596 of rated motor current With a motor with a shaft mounted fan Self is selected and the current for overload is limited to 8796 from 2096 of synchronous speed At lower speed the overload cur rent allowed will be smaller When the motor has an external cooling fan Forced is selected and the overload current allowed starts at 9096 from rated motor current at zero speed up to nominal motor current at 7096 of synchronous speed Fig 58 shows the characteristics with respect for Nomi nal Current and Speed in relation to the motor ventila tion type selected Xlnom for Pt 4 Forced 1 00 X 0 90 0 87 Self None 0 55 0 20 0 70 2 00 xSync Speed Fig 58 Pt curves Motor Identification Run 229 This function is used when the VSD is put into operation for the first time To achieve an optimal control perform ance fine tuning of the motor parameters using a motor ID run is needed During the test run the display shows Test Run blinking To activate the Motor ID run select eith
281. ware that if there is nothing connected to the input the VSD will trip at External Ext Trip 3 trip immediately NOTE The External Trip is active low NOTE Activated according to AND logic Stop command according to the selected Stop mode in menu 33B NOTE The Stop command is active low NOTE Activated according to AND logic Stop 4 Enable command General start condition to run the VSD If made low during running the output of the VSD is cut off immedi ately causing the motor to coast to zero Enable 5 speed NOTE If none of the digital inputs are pro grammed to Enable the internal enable signal is active NOTE Activated according to AND logic Run Right command The output of the Rung 6 VSD will be a clockwise rotary field Run Left command The output of the VSD RunL 7 will be a counter clockwise rotary field Reset 9 Reset command To reset a Trip condition and to enable the Autoreset function Preset Ctrl1 10 To select the Preset Reference Preset Ctrl2 11 To select the Preset Reference Functional Description 115 Preset Ctrl3 12 To select the Preset Reference Increases the internal reference value according to the set AccMotPot time 333 Has the same function as a real motor potentiometer see Fig 73 MotPot Up 13 Decreases the internal reference value a 14 according to the set DecMotPot time 334 See
282. will be reset if the function is active 256 Motor Lost StpFA Off Default Off Off 0 Off 1 3600 1 3600 1 3600 s NOTE Only visible when Motor Lost is selected Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43083 Profibus slot index 168 242 Fieldbus format Long 1 1s Modbus format Elnt Locked Rotor 257 Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone When the time delay has elapsed the alarm will be reset if the function is active 257 Locked Rotor StpEN Off Default Off Off 0 Off 1 3600 1 3600 1 3600 s Power Fault 258 Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone When the time delay has elapsed the alarm will be reset if the function is active 258 Power Fault StpFA Off Default Off Off 0 off 1 3600 1 3600 1 3600 s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43087 Profibus slot index 168 246 Fieldbus format Long 1 1s Modbus format Elnt Undervoltage 259 Delay time starts counting when the fault is gone When the time delay has elapsed the alarm will be reset if the function is active 259 Undervoltage StpEA Off Default Off Off 0 off 1 3600 1 3600 1 3600 s Communication information Modbus Instance no DeviceNet no 43088 Profibus slot index 168 247 Fie
283. y the cooling fans must be tak en into consideration Table 5 Flow rates cooling fans Frame JNVX Model Flow rate m hour B 0003 0018 75 C 0026 0031 120 C 0037 0046 170 E 0090 0175 510 F 0210 0250 800 F69 0090 0175 G 0300 0375 1020 H 0430 0500 1600 H69 0210 0375 0600 0750 2400 169 0430 0500 Table5 Flow rates cooling fans Frame JNVX Model Flow rate m hour J 0860 1000 J69 0600 0650 3200 K 1200 1500 K69 0750 1000 4800 NOTE For the models 0860 to 1500 the mentioned amount of air flow should be divided equally over the two cabinets 2 3 2 Mounting schemes 2330 Fig 16 JNVX48 Model 0300 to 0500 G and H JINVX69 Model 0210 to 0375 H69 Mounting 13 2330 Jo 1000 2330 Jo 1200 Fig 17 JNVX48 Model 0600 to 7500 1 JNVX69 Model 0430 to 0500 169 Fig 18 JNVX48 Model 0860 to 1000 J JNVX69 Model 0600 to 0650 J69 2330 Jo 2000 Fig 19 JNVX48 Model 1200 to 1500 K JNVX69 Model 0750 to 1000 K69 14 Mounting 3 Installation The description of installation in this chapter complies with the EMC standards and the Machine Directive Select cable type and screening according to the EMC requirements valid for the environmen

User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents